Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface
Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3
Contents
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Contents
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
5
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Contents
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
7
Procedures
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8
Contents
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
New in this release
There have been no updates to the document in this release
Other
Revision History
December 2007
August 2007
June 2007
Standard 02.03. This document has been up-issued to support
Communication Server Release 5.5.
Standard 01.03. This document has been up-issued to support a
change request.
Standard 01.02. This document is up-issued to remove the Nortel
Networks Confidential statement.
May 2007
Standard 01.01. This document is issued to support Communication
Server 1000 Release 5.0. This document contains information
previously contained in the following legacy document, now retired:
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
(NN43001-301). No new content has been added for Communication
Server 1000 Release 5.0. All references to Communication Server
1000 Release 4.5 are applicable to Communication Server 1000
Release 5.0.
August 2005
Standard 3.00. This document is up-issued to support
Communication Server 1000 Release 4.5.
September 2004
October 2003
Standard 2.00. This document is up-issued for Communication
Server 1000 Release 4.0.
Standard 1.00. This document is a new technical document for
Succession 3.0. It was created to support a restructuring of the
Documentation Library, which resulted in the merging of multiple
legacy technical documents. This new document consolidates
information previously contained in the following legacy documents,
now retired:
•
•
ISDN Primary Rate Interface: Installation (553-2901-201)
1.5Mb DTI/PRI: Description, Installation and Maintenance
(553-3011-310) (Content from 1.5Mb DTI/PRI: Description,
Installation and Maintenance (553-3011-310) also appears in
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Maintenance (NN43001-717).)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 New in this release
•
2.0Mb DTI/PRI: Description, Installation and Maintenance
(553-3011-315) (Content from 2.0Mb DTI/PRI: Description,
Installation and Maintenance (553-3011-315) also appears in
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Maintenance (NN43001-717).)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11
How to get help
This chapter explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.
Getting help from the Nortel web site
The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel
Technical Support web site:
This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and
tools to address issues with Nortel products. From this site, you can:
•
•
download software, documentation, and product bulletins
search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base
for answers to technical issues
•
•
sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation
for Nortel equipment
open and manage technical support cases
Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center
If you do not find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support
web site, and you have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help over
the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center.
In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).
Outside North America, go to the following web site to obtain the telephone
number for your region:
Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code
To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers, you can use an Express
Routing Code (ERC) to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel
product or service. To locate the ERC for your product or service, go to:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 How to get help
Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller
If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor
or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor
or reseller.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Introduction
This document is a global document. Contact your system supplier or your
Nortel representative to verify that the hardware and software described
are supported in your area.
Subject
Note on legacy products and releases
This technical document contains information about systems, components,
and features that are compatible with Nortel Communication Server
1000 Release 5.5 software. For more information on legacy products
and releases, click the Technical Documentation link under Support &
Training on the Nortel home page:
Applicable systems
This document applies to the following systems:
•
•
Communication Server 1000E (CS 1000E) CP PII, CP PIV and CP PM
Communication Server 1000M Single Group (CS 1000M SG) CP PII,
CP PIV
•
Communication Server 1000M Multi Group (CS 1000M MG) CP PII,
CP PIV
•
•
•
•
Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis
Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet
Meridian 1 PBX 61C CP PII, CP PIV
Meridian 1 PBX 81C CP PII, CP PIV
Note: When upgrading software, memory upgrades may be required on
the Signaling Server, the Call Server, or both.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14 Introduction
System migration
When particular Meridian 1 systems are upgraded to run CS 1000 software
and configured to include a Signaling Server, they become CS 1000
each Meridian 1 system that supports an upgrade path to a CS 1000 system.
Table 1
Meridian 1 systems to CS 1000 systems
This Meridian 1 system...
Meridian 1 PBX 11C Chassis
Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet
Meridian 1 PBX 61C
Maps to this CS 1000 system
CS 1000E
CS 1000E
CS 1000M Single Group
CS 1000M Multi Group
Meridian 1 PBX 81C
Intended audience
This document is intended for individuals responsible for installing and
configuring ISDN PRI.
Related information
This section lists information sources that relate to this document.
Technical Documents
The following technical documents are referenced in this document:
•
•
•
Features and Services Fundamentals (NN43001-106)
Software Input Output Administration (NN43001-611)
Software Input Output Reference — Maintenance (NN43001-711)
Online
To access Nortel documentation online, click the Technical Documentation
link under Support & Training on the Nortel home page:
CD-ROM
To obtain Nortel documentation on CD-ROM, contact your Nortel customer
representative.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
15
ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment
overview
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) hardware requirements 17
Introduction
This chapter describes the basic hardware needed to equip ISDN PRI on
CS 1000 and Meridian 1 systems.
Primary Rate Interface (PRI) hardware requirements
The following hardware is required to equip ISDN PRI on a Large System:
•
•
•
•
NT6D11(AB/AE/AF) D-Channel Interface (DCH) card (for 2.0 Mb PRI)
QPC757 D-channel Interface (DCH) for (1.5 Mb PRI)
NT6D80 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card
NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard (DDCH), the NT5D97
dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card, or the NT5D12 dual-port 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card
•
•
•
•
•
NT8D72 (AB/BA) PRI2 card
NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card
QPC720 1.5 Mb PRI card
NT5D12 dual-port 1.5 DTI/PRI card
QPC775 or NTRB53 Clock Controller
Note: The NTRB53 Clock Controller cannot be combined with a
QPC775 or a QPC471 card in one system
Additional hardware is also required for PRI capability and applications.
Installation instructions are given in other Nortel publications, or supplied by
the manufacturer. This additional hardware includes:
•
•
•
•
QPC414 Network card
Channel Service Unit (CSU)
Echo canceller
ROM circuit card requirements:
— the QPC939A for a CS 1000M HG
— the QPC939A for CS 1000M SG
Note: CS 1000M MG ROM requirements are fulfilled by the NT6D66
Call Processor (CP) card.
•
QMT8 Asynchronous Data Module (ADM)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
cards)" (page 18) for a representation of the basic PRI system hardware.
Note: Figure 1 shows a basic configuration, not the dual-port NT5D12
DTI/PRI card, nor the associated dual-port NTBK51AA Downloadable
D-Channel daughterboard.
Figure 1
PRI hardware (shown without downloadable PRI and DCH cards)
ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) hardware
The following hardware is required for ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) capability
and applications.
Equipment required for shared mode capability:
•
•
•
•
NT6D11(AB/AE/AF) D-Channel (DCH) card (for 2.0 Mb PRI)
QPC757 D-channel (DCH) for (1.5 Mb PRI)
NT6D80 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card
NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard (DDCH), the NT5D97
dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card, or the NT5D12 dual-port 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card
•
•
•
NT8D72 (AB/BA) PRI2 card
NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card
QPC720 1.5 Mb PRI card
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) hardware 19
•
•
NT5D12 dual-port 1.5 DTI/PRI card
QPC775 Clock Controller or NTRB53
Equipment required for dedicated mode using leased lines:
•
•
•
•
NT6D11(AB/AE/AF) D-Channel (DCH) card (for 2.0 Mb PRI)
QPC757 D-channel (DCH) for (1.5 Mb PRI)
NT6D80 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card
NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard (DDCH), used as
an option to the NT6D80 MSDL
•
modem set in synchronous mode
Equipment required for dedicated mode using a dialup modem:
•
•
•
•
NT6D11(AB/AE/AF) D-Channel (DCH) card (for 2.0 Mb PRI)
QPC757 D-channel (DCH) for (1.5 Mb PRI)
NT6D80 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card
NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard (DDCH), used as
an option to the NT6D80 MSDL
•
modem with autodial capability
Note: This configuration is the least reliable due to lockup problems
inherent in Smart Modems from power spikes and noisy lines. To
increase the reliability on this configuration, use a constant power
source when powering the modems. Also, verify that TIE lines meet data
grade specifications. Nortel takes no responsibility for ISL D-Channel
outages due to modem lockup.
•
•
500 set line card
QPC71 2W TIE, or QPC237 4W TIE E&M
Equipment required for dedicated mode using a DTI/DTI2 trunk:
•
•
•
•
NT6D11(AB/AE/AF) D-Channel (DCH) card (for 2.0 Mb PRI)
QPC757 D-channel (DCH) for (1.5 Mb PRI)
NT6D80 Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card
NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard (DDCH), used as
an option to the NT6D80 MSDL
•
•
NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card
QPC472 1.5 Mb DTI card or NT5D12 dual-port 1.5 DTI/PRI card
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
•
•
QMT8 Asynchronous Data Module (ADM), QMT11 Asynchronous/Syn-
chronous Interface Module (ASIM) or QMT21 High Speed Data Module
(HSDM)
Data line card
64 Kbit/s Clear Data Hardware
The QMT21 High Speed Data Module (HSDM) is required in the clear-data
pathway to support the 64Kbit/s clear-data function. One module is required
at each system end of any connection.
D-Channel Handler description
This section provides descriptions of the D-Channel (DCH) cards, the MSDL
card, and the Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard.
NT6D11 DCH
Power requirements
The power requirements for the NT6D11AB/11AE/AF DCH are:
•
•
•
+5 volts at 3 amperes
+12 volts at 75 milliamperes
-12 volts at 75 milliamperes
DCH/PRI interface
The NT6D11AB/AE/AF DCHs connect to the PRI2 cards by means of a
special RS422 cable, the QCAD328A, which is a special RS422 cable; refer
DCH faceplate
NT6D11AB/AE/AF DCHs have one Light Emitting Diode (LED), to indicate
an active or inactive state, and two external connectors:
•
Port J1 is a standard asynchronous port providing an interface for
non-PRI applications.
Note: This connection will not support an Add-on Data Module (ADM)
terminal.
•
Port J2 is the D-Channel Interface port.
Figure 2 "NT6D11 DCH faceplate layout" (page 21) shows the faceplate
layout.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
QPC757 DCH 21
Figure 2
NT6D11 DCH faceplate layout
QPC757 DCH
Power requirements
The power requirements for the QPC757 DCH are:
•
•
•
+5 volts at 3 amperes
+12 volts at 50 milliamperes
–12 volts at 50 milliamperes
DCH/PRI interface
The QPC757 DCH connects to the QPC720 PRI via a RS-422 cable. The
following signals are transmitted across the interface:
•
RCV DATA
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
•
•
•
•
•
RCV CLOCK
XMIT CLOCK
XMIT READY
PRI READY
DCH READY
PRI READY and DCH READY are handshake signals.
QPC757 faceplate
The QPC757 DCH, as shown in Figure 3 "QPC757 DCH faceplate layout"
(page 23) has one LED to indicate an active or inactive state and two
external connectors as follows:
•
Port J1 is a standard asynchronous port in LD 48
Note: This connection does not support an Add-on Data Module (ADM)
terminal.
•
Port J2 is the D-Channel Interface port.
Note: A QPC757 vintage C is required if the ISL Revert to Conventional
Signaling feature is configured. The QPC757 vintage D is recommended
for combination ISL/PRI networks using NACD or Network Message
Services and ISL networks using modems.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT6D80 MSDL 23
Figure 3
QPC757 DCH faceplate layout
NT6D80 MSDL
The NT6D80 MSDL card can be used in conjunction with, or independent
of, the QPC757, or NT6D11AB/AE/AF DCH.
Power requirements
The NT6D80 MSDL power requirements are:
Voltage
(VAC)
Power
(Watts)
Heat
(BTUs)
Current
(Amps)
+5
+12
-12
3.20
0.10
0.10
16.00
1.20
1.20
55.36
4.15
4.15
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
MSDL/PRI interface
MSDL can connect to PRI trunks through RS-422 or RS-232 interfaces.
The interfaces are switch configured.
MSDL faceplate
The NT6D80 MSDL has one LED to indicate an active or inactive state and
four external connectors. Each port can be RS-422 or RS-232 connectors,
Figure 4
NT6D80 MSDL faceplate layout
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT8D72 PRI2 25
NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard
The NTBK51 is a two port Downloadable D-Channel Daughterboard (DDCH)
that has been introduced as an option to the NT6D80 MSDL, the NT5D97
dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card, or the NT5D12 dual-port 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card.
The NTBK51 supports all the features of the existing 4 port MSDL
(NT6D80), and eliminates the need for an external DCH card and associated
cables for MSDL applications. The NTBK51 can support a maximum of 32
(16*2) MSDL type D-Channels per system, unlike the MSDL which can
support a maximum of 64.
Note 1: Only one version, the NTBK51AA, can be used with the
NT5D97, or the NT5D12. The NTBK51BA version has only 30+30 pin
connectors (instead of 40+30 pins in the AA version). The missing 10
pins in the BA version prohibits the use of port 0 on the NT5D97, or
NT5D12 card.
Note 2: The software allocation for NTBK51AA DDCH is similar to
the MSDL. It is both physical and logical, and supports D-Channel
functionality only.
Note 3: Port 0 has to be an even loop on the DDP2, and Port 1 has to
be an odd loop. Port 2 and Port 3 should not be configured.
The connection between the dual-port cards and the DDCH daughterboard
is made using two headers: one 30 pin and one 40 pin connector.
Standard PRI cards
This section provides a description of the standard ISDN PRI cards, namely
the NT8D72 (AB/BA) PRI2 card, and the QPC720 1.5 Mb PRI card.
NT8D72 PRI2
Power requirements
The NT8D72AB and NT8D72BA PRI use power and ground connections
from the backplane. Power requirements are:
+5 volts at 4 amperes
+12 volts at 50 milliamperes
-12 volts at 50 milliamperes
NT8D72 faceplate
"NT8D72 PRI faceplate layout" (page 26) shows the faceplate layout.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 5
NT8D72 PRI faceplate layout
about the external connectors located on the NT8D72 PRI2 faceplate.
Table 2
NT8D72 PRI External connectors
Faceplate Destination
Type
Description
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
9-pin female, D-connector
9-pin female, D-connector
36-pin connector
Reference Clock 0 interface
Reference Clock 1 interface
Loop interface
15-pin male, D-connector
15-pin male, D-connector
15-pin female, D-connector
External digital trunk
D-Channel interface
Echo Canceller/RS-232 interface
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT8D72 PRI2 27
Faceplate Destination
RCV MON
Type
Description
Miniature bantam jack
Miniature bantam jack
Monitor DSI from network
Monitor DSI from PRI
XMT MON
Cable requirements
external NT8D72 PRI2 connections.
Note: No additional cabling is required for nB+D configurations. Multiple
PRIs and the D-Channel are associated at the PRI prompt in LD 17.
Table 3
NT8D72AB and NT8D72BA PRI: Cables and cable lengths
Maximum length
(meters)
Cable Type
NT8D79AA
NT8D79AA
QCAD328A
QCAD328B
QCAD328C
QCAD328D
NTND26AA
NTND26AB
NTND26AC
NTND26AD
NT8D85AB
RS-232
From
To
2.13
2.13
1.8
PRI card
PRI card
PRI card
PRI card
PRI card
PRI card
PRI card
PRI card
PRI card
PRI card
PRI card Network
PRI card
PRI card
I/O panel
Clock controller (CC-0)
Clock controller (CC-1)
DCH card
5.5
DCH card
10.67
15.24
1.8
DCH card
DCH card
MSDL
5.5
MSDL
10.67
15.24
15.24
15.24
3.05
15.24
MSDL
MSDL
Network Card
Echo canceller
I/O panel
NT8D7207
NT8D7205
crossconnect
Carrier interface
The NT8D72 PRI2 provides an interface to the 2Mb external digital
line either directly or through an office repeater, echo canceller or line
terminating unit (LTU).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Echo canceller interface
Echo cancellers are required only on satellite transmission circuits. The
echo canceller detects the length of the loop, and then cancels out reflected
transmission. (Callers will not hear echoes of their own voices reflecting
back to them from the far end of the call.)
The echo canceller’s control protocol must conform with that of the Tellabs
Model 251. Both the echo canceller and the PRI circuit card act as Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE).
QMT21 High Speed Data Module
The QMT21 High Speed Data Module supports the 64K Clear Data feature.
(It allows data terminating equipment (DTE) to send and receive 64-Kb/s
clear data.) The QMT21B is required for Large System to Large System
configurations.
QPC720 PRI for 1.5/2.0 Mb gateway
Systems which are being used as a 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway, one or more
QPC720 (1.5 Mb) Primary Rate Interface circuit cards will also be needed.
Note: Older vintages of the QPC720 PRI cannot be used for Gateway
applications. The 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway feature requires the use of a
QPC720 circuit card with firmware updated to provide modified PAD
values.
Clock operation for the NT8D72
There are two types of clock operation—tracking mode and free-run mode.
Tracking mode
In tracking mode, the PRI loop supplies an external clock reference to a
clock controller. Two PRI loops can operate in tracking mode, with one
defined as the primary reference source for clock synchronization, the other
defined as the secondary reference source. The secondary reference acts
as a back-up to the primary reference.
(page 29), a system with dual CPUs can have two clock controllers (CC-0
and CC-1). One clock controller acts as a back-up to the other. The clock
controllers should be completely locked to the reference clock.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT8D72 PRI2 29
Figure 6
Clock controller primary and secondary tracking
Free run (non-tracking) mode
The clock synchronization of the system can operate in free-run mode if:
•
•
•
no loop is defined as the primary or secondary clock reference,
the primary and secondary references are disabled, or
the primary and secondary references are in local alarm
Reference clock errors
The system software checks at intervals of 1 to 15 minutes to see if a clock
controller or reference-clock error has occurred. (The interval of this check
can be configured in LD 73.)
In tracking mode, at any one time, there is one active clock controller which
is tracking on one reference clock. If a clock-controller error is detected, the
system switches to the back-up clock controller, without affecting which
reference clock is being tracked.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
A reference-clock error occurs when there is a problem with the clock driver
or with the reference clock at the far end. If the clock controller detects a
reference-clock error, the reference clocks are switched.
Automatic clock recovery
A command for automatic clock recovery can be selected in LD 60 with
the command EREF.
A PRI loop is disabled when it enters a local-alarm condition. If the local
alarm is cleared, the loop is enabled automatically. When the loop is
enabled, clock tracking is restored in the following conditions:
1. If the loop is assigned as the primary reference clock but the clock
controller is tracking on the secondary reference or in free-run mode, it
is restored to tracking on primary.
2. If the loop is assigned as the secondary reference clock but the clock
controller is in free-run mode, it is restored to tracking on secondary.
If the clock check indicates the switch is in free-run mode:
1. Tracking is restored to the primary reference clock if defined.
2. If the primary reference is disabled or in local alarm, tracking is restored
to the secondary reference clock if defined.
Note: If the switch is put into free-run mode by the craftsperson, it will
resume tracking on a reference clock unless the clock-switching option
has been disabled (LD 60, command MREF), or the reference clock has
been "undefined" in the database.
Automatic clock switching
If the EREF command is selected in LD 60, tracking on the primary or
secondary reference clock is automatically switched in the following manner:
1. If software is unable to track on the assigned primary reference clock, it
switches to the secondary reference clock and sends appropriate DTC
maintenance messages.
2. If software is unable to track on the assigned secondary reference clock,
it switches to free run.
QPC720 PRI
The QPC720 PRI card is required for PRI operation in all machine types.
Power requirements
The QPC720 PRI uses power and ground from the backplane. This card
does not require an intelligent bus. Power requirements are:
•
+5 volts at 6 amperes
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
QPC720 PRI 31
•
•
+12 volts at 50 milliamperes
-12 volts at 50 milliamperes
QPC720 faceplate
"QPC720 PRI faceplate layout" (page 31) shows the QPC720 PRI faceplate
information about the external connectors located on the QPC720 PRI
faceplate.
Figure 7
QPC720 PRI faceplate layout
Table 4
QPC720 PRI external connectors
Faceplate destination
Type
J1
9-pin female, D-connector
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Faceplate destination
Type
J2
9-pin female, D-connector
36-pin connector
J3
J4
15-pin male, D-connector
15-pin male, D-connector
15-pin female, D-connector
Miniature bantam jack
Miniature bantam jack
J5
J6
RCV MON
XMT MON
QPC720 Cable requirements
cable used and the lengths required for external QPC720 PRI connections.
Note: No additional cabling is required for nB+D configurations. Multiple
PRIs and the D-channel are associated through software in LD 17,
prompt PRI.
Carrier interface
The QPC720 PRI provides an interface to the DS-1 Channel either directly,
through an office repeater, or through an Echo Canceller.
The T1 Channel Service Units listed below are compatible with the QPC720
PRI card and the 64K Clear Data feature as well as with PRI connection
parameters such as the Superframe format, the Extended superframe
format, and the B7 and B8ZS Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) line coding.
•
•
•
•
•
Digital Link 551A
Digital Link 551C
Digital Link 551E
Tellabs Model 441
Verilink Model 551V ST
In the U.S.A., FCC Part 68 regulations require Network Channel Terminating
Equipment (for example, the NT QRY551 Channel Service Unit) installed
at of the point of connection between a system and a registered common
carrier trunk.
Echo Canceller interface
Echo Cancellers are required only with satellite transmission. The Echo
Canceller detects the length of the loop, then cancels the reflected
transmission (callers do not hear their own voices echoed).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
QPC720 PRI 33
The QPC720 PRI provides both a T1 line interface and a control interface to
link to a signal format compatible with EIA standard RS-232-C. Both the PRI
and the Echo Canceller act as Data Terminal Equipment (DTE). The Echo
Canceller’s control protocol must conform to that of the Tellabs Model 251.
64 T-link version 2 protocol
The QPC720 card supports the 64 T-link version 2 protocol. The QPC720
together with theQMT21 High Speed Data Module supports the 64K Clear
Data feature. The QPC720 card provides a trunk that ties two switches
together. This trunk allows 64K eClear Data to pass from the system to an
outside network. The QMT21 module allows Data Terminal Equipment
(DTE) to send and receive 64K Clear Data. See Meridian Link ISDN/AP
General Guide (553-2901-100) for more information about the 64K Clear
Data feature.
Table 5
QPC720 PRI cables and cable lengths
Maximum
length
Maximum
Cable type
QCAD130
QCAD130
QCAD328A
QCAD328B
QCAD328C
QCAD328D
QCAD124
QCAD128
RS-232
From
To
length (feet)
(meters)
7
7
2.13
2.13
1.8
QPC720
QPC720
QPC720
QPC720
QPC720
QPC720
QPC720
QPC720
QPC720
QPC720
QPC720
QPC720
QPC720
QPC720
QPC471/QPC775 (CC-0)
QPC471/QPC775 (CC-1)
QPC757 DCHI
QPC757 DCHI
QPC757 DCHI
QPC757 DCHI
QPC414 Network
Bulkhead I/O panel
Echo Canceller
NT6D80 MSDL
NT6D80 MSDL
NT6D80 MSDL
NT6D80 MSDL
Input/output panel
6
5.5
18
35
50
50
25
50
6
10.67
15.24
15.24
7.62
15.24
1.8
NTND26AA
NTND26AB
NTND26AC
NTND26AD
NTND98
5.5
18
35
50
6
10.67
15.24
1.8
655
199.64
22AWG ABAM
Echo Canceller DSX-1
Note: The QPC775 Clock Controller is not available in the U.S.A. There
can be no mixing of QPC775 and QPC471 in one system.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Disk drive hardware
The following hardware is required for Large System upgrades:
•
3.5-inch disk drive unit
disk drive controller for above
cable for above
•
•
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card
The NT5D97 is a dual-port 2.0 Mb DTI2/PRI2 card (the DDP2 firmware
functions in DTI2 or PRI2 mode, depending on DIP switch settings) that
integrates the functionality of two NT8D72BA PRI2 cards, and one QPC414
ENET card into a single CE card. The NT5D97 occupies a single slot in
the Network shelf and provides two DTI2/PRI2 network connections: an
interface to an external D-Channel Handler (the NT6D11AF) or the NT6D80
Multipurpose Serial Data Link card, and an optional plug-on NTBK51AA
Downloadable D-Channel daughterboard (DDCH) with two DCH interface
ports.
The NT5D97 DDP2 card can be mixed in the same machine with PRI2
NT8D72BA cards.
The NT5D97 DDP2 card hardware design uses a B57 ASIC E1/T1 framer.
The carrier specifications comply with the ANSI TI.403 specification. The
NT5D97 provides an interface to the 2.048 Mbps external digital line
either directly or through an office repeater, Network Channel Terminating
Equipment (NCTE), or Line Terminating Unit (LTU).
DANGER
DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
The NT5D97 DDP2 card is not designed to be connected
directly to the Public Switched Network, or other exposed plant
networks. Such a connection should only be done using an
isolating-type networking terminating device that provides voltage
surge protection, such as a Line Terminating Unit (LTU), Network
Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE), or Network Termination
1 (NT1), as certified by your local, regional, or national safety
agency and telecommunications authority.
External D-Channel Interface DCH or MSDL
The connection between the DDP2 card and the external DCH or MSDL is
through a 26 pin female D type connector. The data signals conform to the
electrical characteristics of the EIA standard RS-422.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 35
Two control signals are used to communicate the D-channel link status
to the DCH or MSDL. These are:
•
Receiver Ready (RR), originating at the DDP2 card, to indicate to the
DCH or MSDL that the D-channel link is operational.
•
Transmitter Ready (TR), originating at the DCH or MSDL, to indicate to
the DDP2 card that the DCH are ready to use the D-channel link.
how the RR control signal operates with regard to the DDP2 status.
Table 6
DCH/MSDL Receiver Ready control signals
RR State
Condition
ON
D-Channel data rate selected at 64 Kbps
and
PRI2 loop is enabled
and
PRI2 link is not in OOS or Local Alarm mode state
and
PRI2 link is not transmitting a Remote Alarm pattern
and
PRI2 link is not receiving a Remote Alarm Indication from
a remote facility
OFF
All other conditions
NT5D97 faceplate
Figure 8 "NT5D97 faceplate" (page 36) illustrates the faceplate layout for
the NT5D97 DDP card. The faceplate contains an enable/disable switch;
a DDCH status LED; 6 x 2 trunk port status LEDs; and six external
name of each connector, its designation with respect to the faceplate and
the name and description of the card it is connected to. Also shown are the
names of the LEDs.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 8
NT5D97 faceplate
Table 7
External connectors and LEDs
Faceplate
Function
Designator
Type
Description
Switch
ENB/DIS
Plastic, ESD protected Card Enable/disable
switch
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 37
Faceplate
Function
Designator
Type
Description
Connectors
Unit 0 Clock 0
Unit 0 Clock 1
Unit 1 Clock 0
Unit 1 Clock 1
RJ11 Connector
RJ11 Connector
RJ11 Connector
RJ11 Connector
Connects reference
clock 0 to Clock
Controller card 0
Connects reference
clock 0 to Clock
Controller card 1
Connects reference
clock 1 to Clock
Controller card 0
Connects reference
clock 1 to Clock
Controller card 1
J5 TRK
J6 DCH
ENET
DIS
9 Pin
Female D Connector
Two external E1 Trunk
0 and Trunk 1
26 Pin
Female D Connector
Connects to external
DCH or MSDL
LEDs
2 Red LEDs
ENET 0 or ENET 1 is
disabled
2 Red LEDs
Trunk 0 or Trunk 1 is
disabled
OOS
NEA
FEA
LBK
2 Yellow LEDs
2 Yellow LEDs
2 Yellow LEDs
2 Yellow LEDs
Trunk is out of service
Local (Near End) Alarm
Far End Alarm
Loop Back test being
performed on Trunk 0
or Trunk 1
DCH
Bicolor Red/Green LED NTBK51AA status
The following is a brief description of each element on the faceplate.
Enable/Disable Switch
This switch is used to disable the card prior to insertion or removal from
the network shelf. While this switch is in disable position, the card will not
respond to the system CPU.
ENET LEDs
Two red LEDs indicate if the "ENET0" and "ENET1" portions of the card are
disabled. These LEDs are lit in the following cases:
•
•
When the enable/disable switch is in disabled state (lit by hardware).
After power-up, before the card is enabled.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
•
When the ENET port on the card is disabled by software.
Trunk Disable (DIS) LEDs
Two red LEDs indicate if the "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1" portions of the
card are disabled. These LEDs are lit in the following cases:
•
•
upon reception of the "disable loop" message from the software
after power-up
OOS LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if the "trunk port 0" and "trunk port 1" portions of
the card are out-of-service.
NEA LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if the near end detects absence of incoming signal
or loss of synchronization in "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1" respectively.
The Near End Alarm causes a Far End Alarm signal to be transmitted to
the far end.
FEA LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if a Far End Alarm has been reported by the far
end (usually in response to a Near End Alarm condition at the far end)
on "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1".
LBK LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if a remote loopback test is being performed on
trunk port 0 or trunk port 1. The loopback indication is active when the
digital trunk is in remote loopback mode. Normal call processing is inhibited
during the remote loopback test.
DCH LED
When the dual colored LED is red, it indicates the onboard DDCH is present
but disabled. When the dual colored LED is green, it indicates the onboard
DDCH is present and enabled. If a DDCH is not configured on the DDP2
card, this lamp is not lit.
Unit 0 Clk Connectors
Two RJ11 connectors for connecting:
•
•
Digital trunk unit 0 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 0.
Digital trunk unit 0 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 1.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 39
Unit 1 Clk Connectors
Two RJ11 connectors for connecting:
•
•
Digital trunk unit 1 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 0.
Digital trunk unit 1 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 1.
Connector J5 (TRK)
A 9 pin D-Type connector used to connect:
•
•
Digital trunk unit 0 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs
Digital trunk unit 1 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs
Connector J6 (DCH)
A 26-pin D-type connector is used to connect the DDP2 card to the external
MSDL or D-channel handler.
System capacity and performance
Physical capacity
Each NT5D97 DDP2 card occupies one slot on the network shelf. Each card
supports two digital trunk circuits and two network loops. The total number
of DDP2 cards per system is limited by the number of network loops,
physical capacity of the shelf, number of DTI2/PRI2 interfaces allowed by
the software and the range of DCH addresses.
D-Channel capacity
The software configuration for the NTBK51AA DDCH is similar to the MSDL
and only supports D-channel functionality.
The system has a total capacity of 16 addresses (Device Addresses or
DNUM) that can be reserved for DCH card, MSDL card or DDCH card. One
exception is DNUM 0 which is commonly assigned to the TTY terminal.
No two different D-Channel providers can share the same DNUM. Hence,
the combined maximum number of DCH, MSDL and DDCH cards in the
system is 16.
The DCH has one D-Channel unit, the DDCH has two D-Channel units,
and the MSDL has a maximum of four units. Therefore, the total number
of D-Channel is derived by the following formula:
Total_Num_DCH-Units = Num_DCHx1 + Num_DDCHx2 + Num_MSDLx4
Therefore, Total_Num_DCH-Units in any given system is between 0-63.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
CPU capacity
Using a NT5D97 DDP2 card instead of DTI2/PRI2 cards does not increase
the load on the system CPU. The DDP2 replaces an ENET card and two
DTI2/PRI2 cards. Emulating the ENET card and the overall CPU capacity is
not impacted by using a DDP2 card instead of a DTI2/PRI2 card.
Power requirements
requirements for the NT5D97 DDP2 card.
Table 8
NT5D97 DDP2 power requirements
Voltage
Source
Current
DDP2
(without
DDP2
(with
NTBK51AA)
NTBK51AA)
+5V
Backplane
3A
3.8A
+12V
-12V
Backplane
Backplane
25mA
25mA
15.6W
75mA
75mA
20.8W
Total Power (Maximum)
Testability and diagnostics
The DDP2 card supports testing and maintenance functions through the
following procedures:
•
•
•
Self test upon power up or reset
Signalling test performed in the LD 30
Loopback tests, self tests, and continuity tests performed by LD 60
and LD 45
•
The D-Channel (DCH, MSDL, DDCH) maintenance is supported by
LD 96.
Note: The MSDL selftest is not applicable to the NTBK51AA D-Channel
daughterboard.
Cable requirements
This section lists the types of cable used and the lengths required for
internal and external NT5D97 DDP2 connections.
Note: No additional cabling is required for nB+D configurations. Multiple
DDP2 cards and the D-channel are associated through software in
LD 17.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 41
DDP2 cable assemblies include:
•
•
•
•
E1 carrier cables
— NTCK45AA (A0407956)
— NT8D7217 (A0617192)
— NTCK78AA (A0618294)
— NTCK79AA (A0618296)
DDP2 to QPC471/QPC775 Clock Controller Cables
— NTCG03AA
— NTCG03AB
— NTCG03AC
— NTCG03AD
DDP2 to DCH cables
— NTCK46AA
— NTCK46AB
— NTCK46AC
— NTCK46AD
DDP2 to MSDL cables
— NTCK80AA
— NTCK80AB
— NTCK80AC
— NTCK80AD
A description of each type of DDP2 cable follows.
E1 carrier cables
NTCK45AA (A0407956) The NTCK45AA (8 ft.) is an 120W cable for
systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the TRK port (P1,
D-type 9 pin male) on the DDP2 faceplate to the I/O filter (P2, P3 D-type 9
pin males).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 9
NTCK45AA
NTCK45AA cable.
Table 9
NTCK45AA cable pins
DDP2
pins
I/O Panel
pins
Cable
Name
Description
Color
Black
Red
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
T-PRI0TX
R-PRI0TX
T-PRI0RX
R-PRI0RX
Trunk 0 Transmit Tip
Trunk 0 Transmit Ring
Trunk 0 Receive Tip
Trunk 0 Receive Ring
GND Shield Wire
P1-1
P2-6
P2-2
P2-7
Black
White
Bare
Bare
Bare
Bare
Black
Red
P1-3
P2-2
P1-4
P2-3
N/C
Case P2
Case P2
P2-5
GND Shield Wire
N/C
Standard Wire (3")
Standard Wire (3")
Trunk 1 Transmit Tip
Trunk 1 Transmit Ring
Trunk 1 Receive Tip
Trunk 1 Receive Ring
GND Shield Wire
Case P2
Case P2
P1-5
P2-9
T-PRI1TX
R-PRI1TX
T-PRI1RX
R-PRI1RX
P3-6
P1-6
P3-7
Black
White
Bare
Bare
Bare
Bare
P1-7
P3-2
P1-8
P3-3
N/C
Case P3
Case P3
P3-5
GND Shield Wire
N/C
Standard Wire (3")
Standard Wire (3")
Case P3
Case P3
P3-9
NT8D7217 (A0617192) The NT8D7217 (50 ft.) is a 120W cable for
systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the 9 pin I/O filter
connector to the 9 pin NCTE connector.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 43
Figure 10
NT8D7217
attributes for the NT8D7217 cable.
Table 10
NT8D7217 cable pins
DDP2
pins
I/O Panel
pins
Cable
Name
Description
Color
Black
White
Black
Red
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
T-PRI0TX
R-PRI0TX
T-PRI0RX
R-PRI0RX
Trunk 0 Transmit Tip
Trunk 0 Transmit Ring
Trunk 0 Receive Tip
Trunk 0 Receive Ring
GND Shield Wire
P1-6
P1-7
P1-2
P1-3
P1-5
P1-9
P1-6
P1-7
P1-2
P1-3
P1-5
P1-9
P2-6
P2-7
P2-2
P2-3
N/C
Bare
Bare
Black
White
Black
Red
GND Shield Wire
N/C
T-PRI1TX
R-PRI1TX
T-PRI1RX
R-PRI1RX
Trunk 1 Transmit Tip
Trunk 1 Transmit Ring
Trunk 1 Receive Tip
Trunk 1 Receive Ring
GND Shield Wire
P2-6
P2-7
P2-2
P2-3
N/C
Bare
Bare
GND Shield Wire
N/C
NTCK78AA (A0618294) The NTCK78AA (50 ft.) is a 120W cable for
connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin male)
to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) (P2, P3 D-type 15-pin males). The
NTCK78AA is used for systems not equipped with an I/O filter panel.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 11
NTCK78AA
NTCK78AA cable.
Table 11
NTCK78AA cable pins
DDP2
pins
NCTE
pins
Cable
Name
Description
Color
Black
Red
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
T-PRI0TX
R-PRI0TX
T-PRI0RX
R-PRI0RX
Trunk 0 Transmit Tip
Trunk 0 Transmit Ring
Trunk 0 Receive Tip
Trunk 0 Receive Ring
GND Shield Wire
P1-1
P2-1
P2-9
P2-3
P2-11
P2-2
P2-4
P3-1
P3-9
P3-3
P3-11
P3-2
P3-4
P1-2
Black
White
Bare
Bare
Black
Red
P1-3
P1-4
P1 Case
P1 Case
P1-5
GND Shield Wire
T-PRI1TX
R-PRI1TX
T-PRI1RX
R-PRI1RX
Trunk 1 Transmit Tip
Trunk 1 Transmit Ring
Trunk 1 Receive Tip
Trunk 1 Receive Ring
GND Shield Wire
P1-6
Black
White
Bare
Bare
P1-7
P1-8
P1 Case
P1 Case
GND Shield Wire
NTCK79AA (A0618296) The NTCK79AA (40 ft) is a 75W coaxial cable for
connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin male) to
the Line Terminating Unit (LTU) (P2, P3, P4, P5 BNC males).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 45
Figure 12
NTCK79AA
NTCK79AA cable.
Table 12
NTCK79AA cable pins
DDP2
pins
NCTE
pins
Cable
Name
Description
Color
0
T-PRI0TX
Trunk 0 Transmit Tip
Red
P1-1
P2 inner
conductor
0
0
R-PRI0TX
T-PRI0RX
Trunk 0 Transmit Ring
Trunk 0 Receive Tip
Red
P1-2
P1-3
P2 shield
Green
P3 inner
conductor
0
1
R-PRI0RX
T-PRI1TX
Trunk 0 Receive Ring
Trunk 1 Transmit Tip
Green
Red
P1-4
P1-5
P3 shield
P4 inner
conductor
1
1
R-PRI1TX
T-PRI1RX
Trunk 1 Transmit Ring
Trunk 1 Transmit Tip
Red
P1-6
P1-7
P4 shield
Green
P5 inner
conductor
1
1
1
R-PRI1RX
Trunk 1 Receive Ring
Outer metalized PVC shield
3 stranded wire
Green
Bare
P1-8
N/C
N/C
P5 shield
P1 Case
P1 Case
Bare
Reference clock cables
The NTCG03AA (14 ft), NTCG03AB (2.8 ft), NTCG03AC (4.0 ft), or
NTCG03AD (7 ft), is a DDP2 card to Clock Controller cable, connecting
each of the CLK0 or CLK1 ports on the DDP2 faceplate to the primary or
secondary source ports on Clock Controller card 0 or 1.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 13
NTCG03AA/AB/AC/AD
MSDL/DCH cables
External DCH cable The NTCK46 cable connects the DDP2 card to the
NT6D11AF/NT5K75AA/NT5K35AA D-Channel Handler card. The cable
is available in four different sizes:
•
•
•
•
NTCK46AA (6 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable
NTCK46AB (18 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable
NTCK46AC (35 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable
NTCK46AD (50 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable
Figure 14
NTCK46AA/AB/AC/AD
External MSDL cable The NTCK80 cable connects the DDP2 card to the
NT6D80 MSDL card. The cable is available in four different sizes:
•
•
•
•
NTCK80AA (6 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable
NTCK80AB (18 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable
NTCK80AC (35 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable
NTCK80AD (50 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 47
Figure 15
NTCK80AA/AB/AC/AD
Cable diagrams
examples of typical cabling configurations for the DDP2.
typical DDP2 cabling for a system with an I/O panel, with the connection
between the I/O panel and a Network Channel Terminating Equipment
(NCTE).
cabling for a system without an I/O panel. Here, the DDP2 faceplate is
cabled directly to the NCTE.
Note: Since several clock cabling options exist, none has been
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 16
DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 49
Figure 17
DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel
Clock for the NT5D97
Clock operation
There are two types of clock operation — tracking mode and free-run mode.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Tracking mode In tracking mode, the DDP2 loop supplies an external
clock reference to a clock controller. Two DDP2 loops can operate in
tracking mode, with one defined as the primary reference source for clock
synchronization, the other defined as the secondary reference source. The
secondary reference acts as a back-up to the primary reference.
(page 50), a system with dual CPUs can have two clock controllers (CC-0
and CC-1). One clock controller acts as a back-up to the other. The clock
controllers should be completely locked to the reference clock.
Figure 18
Clock Controller primary and secondary tracking
Free run (non-tracking) mode The clock synchronization of the system
can operate in free-run mode if:
•
•
•
no loop is defined as the primary or secondary clock reference,
the primary and secondary references are disabled, or
the primary and secondary references are in local (near end) alarm
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 51
Reference clock errors
The system software checks at intervals of 1 to 15 minutes to see if a clock
controller or reference-clock error has occurred. (The interval of this check
can be configured in LD 73).
In tracking mode, at any one time, there is one active clock controller which
is tracking on one reference clock. If a clock controller error is detected, the
system switches to the back-up clock controller, without affecting which
reference clock is being tracked.
A reference-clock error occurs when there is a problem with the clock driver
or with the reference clock at the far end. If the clock controller detects a
reference-clock error, the reference clocks are switched.
Automatic clock recovery
A command for automatic clock recovery can be selected in LD 60 with
the command EREF.
A DDP2 loop is disabled when it enters a local-alarm condition. If the local
alarm is cleared, the loop is enabled automatically. When the loop is
enabled, clock tracking is restored in the following conditions:
•
If the loop is assigned as the primary reference clock but the clock
controller is tracking on the secondary reference or in free-run mode, it
is restored to tracking on primary.
•
•
If the loop is assigned as the secondary reference clock but the clock
controller is in free-run mode, it is restored to tracking on secondary.
If the clock check indicates the switch is in free-run mode:
— Tracking is restored to the primary reference clock if defined.
— If the primary reference is disabled or in local alarm, tracking is
restored to the secondary reference clock if defined.
Note: If the system is put into free-run mode by the craftsperson,
it resumes tracking on a reference clock unless the clock-switching
option is disabled (LD 60, command MREF), or the reference clock is
"undefined" in the database.
Automatic clock switching
If the EREF command is selected in LD 60, tracking on the primary or
secondary reference clock is automatically switched in the following manner:
•
•
If software is unable to track on the assigned primary reference clock, it
switches to the secondary reference clock and sends appropriate DTC
maintenance messages.
If software is unable to track on the assigned secondary reference clock,
it switches to free run.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Clock configurations
Clock Controllers can be used in a single or a dual CPU system.
A single CPU system has one Clock Controller card. This card can receive
reference clocks from two sources referred to as the primary and secondary
sources. These two sources can originate from a PRI2, DTI2, etc. PRI2
cards such as the NT8D72BA are capable of supplying two references of
the same clock source. These are known as Ref1 (available at J1) and Ref2
(available at J2) on the NT8D72BA.
The NT5D12 card is capable of supplying two references from each clock
source, i.e., four references in total. NT5D12 can supply Clk0 and Clk1 from
Unit 0 and Clk0 and Clk1 from Unit 1. Either Unit 0 or Unit 1 can originate
primary source, as shown in Figure 19 "Clock Controller - Option 1" (page
There is one Clock Controller cable required for the DDP2 card, which
is available in four sizes; this is the NTCG03AA/AB/AC/AD. Refer to
"Reference clock cables" (page 45) for more information.
Table 13
Clock Controller options - summary
CC Option
CPU Type
Notes
Option 1
Single
Ref from P0 on Clk0
Ref from P1 on Clk0
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
Dual
Dual
Dual
Ref from P0 on Clk0
Ref from P0 on Clk1
Ref from P1 on Clk0
Ref from P1 on Clk1
Ref from P0 on Clk0
Ref from P0 on Clk1
Ref from P1 on Clk0
Ref from P1 on Clk1
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 53
Table 14
Clock Controller options - description
Notes
Clock Option
Option 1
This option provides a single CPU system with 2 clock
sources derived from the 2 ports of the DDP2.
Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 0.
Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 1.
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2
references of a clock source derived from port 0 of the
DDP2.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from
Unit 0.
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from
Unit 0.
This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2
references of a clock source derived from port 1 of the
DDP2.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from
Unit 1.
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from
Unit 1.
This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2
references from each clock source derived from the
DDP2.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from
Unit 0.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Notes
Clock Option
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from
Unit 0.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from
Unit 1.
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from
Unit 1.
Figure 19
Clock Controller - Option 1
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card 55
Figure 20
Clock Controller - Option 2
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 21
Clock Controller - Option 3
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 57
Figure 22
Clock Controller - Option 4
NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI
The NT5D12 is a dual-port 1.5 DTI/PRI card (the DDP firmware functions in
DTI or PRI mode) integrating the functionality of two QPC472 DTI/DDP2
PRI cards and one QPC414 ENET into one card. The NT5D12 occupies a
single Network shelf slot and provides two DTI/PRI network connections,
an optional connection to an external D-Channel Handler, the QPC757
D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) or NT6D80 Multipurpose Serial Data
Link (MSDL), and an optional plug-on NTBK51AA Downloadable D-Channel
daughterboard (DDCH.)
The NT5D12 DDP card supports all features (except the echo canceller and
protocol conversion) of the QPC720. In addition, it maintains the backward
compatibility of QPC720.
The NT5D12 DDP card hardware design uses a B57 ASIC E1/T1 framer.
The carrier specifications comply with the ANSI TI.403 specification. The
NT5D12 provides an interface to the 1.5 Mb external digital line either
directly or through an office repeater, Line Terminating Unit (LTU), or
Channel Service Unit (CSU).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
D-Channel and MSDL interface
The connection between the DDP card and the DCHI or MSDL is via a 26
pin female D type connector. The data signals conform to the electrical
characteristics of the EIA standard RS-422.
Two control signals are used to communicate the D-Channel link status
to the DCHI or MSDL. These are:
•
Receiver Ready (RR), originating at the DDP card, to indicate to the
DCHI or MSDL that the D-channel link is operational.
•
Transmitter Ready (TR), originating at the DCHI or MSDL, to indicate to
the DDP card that the DCHI or MSDL are ready to use the D-Channel
link.
how the RR control signal operates with regard to the DDP status.
Table 15
DCHI/MSDL Receiver Ready control signals
RR State
Condition
ON
D-Channel data rate selected at 64 Kbps or 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps
inverted
and
PRI loop is enabled
and
PRI link is not in RED alarm mode state
and
PRI link is not transmitting a yellow alarm pattern
and
PRI link is not receiving a Remote Alarm Indication from the
remote facility
and
PRI link is not in FA3 mode
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 59
RR State
Condition
and
Transmitter Ready (TR) control signal from the DCHI/MSDL is
ON
OFF
All other conditions
NT5D12 faceplate
"DDP faceplate - detailed view" (page 61) illustrate the faceplate layout
for the NT5D12 DDP card. The faceplate contains an enable/disable
switch; a DDCH status LED; 6 x 2 trunk port status LEDs; and six external
name of each connector, its designation with respect to the faceplate and
the name and description of the card it is connected to. Also shown are the
names of the LEDs.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 23
NT5D12 faceplate - general view
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 61
Figure 24
DDP faceplate - detailed view
Table 16
External connectors and LEDs
Faceplate
Designator
Function
Switch
Type
Plastic, ESD
protected
Description
ENB/DIS
Card Enable/disable switch
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Faceplate
Function
Designator
Type
Description
Port 0 Clock 0
RJ11 Connector
Connects reference clock to
Clock Controller card
Port 0 Clock 1
Port 1 Clock 0
Port 1 Clock 1
J5 TRK
RJ11 Connector
RJ11 Connector
RJ11 Connector
9 Pin Female
Connects reference clock to
Clock Controller card
Connects reference clock to
Clock Controller card
Connects reference clock to
Clock Controller card
Connectors
Two external DS-1 Trunk 0 and
Trunk 1
D Connector
J6 DCH
26 Pin Female
Connects to DCHI or MSDL
D Connector
2 Red LEDs
2 Red LEDs
2 Green LEDs
2 Red LEDs
2 Yellow LEDs
OOS
DIS
ENET 0 or ENET 1 disabled
Trunk 0 or Trunk 1 disabled
Trunk 0 or Trunk 1 lines active
Red Alarm on Trunk 0 or Trunk 1
ACT
RED
YEL
Yellow Alarm on Trunk 0 or Trunk
1
LEDs
LBK
2 Green LEDs
Loop Back test being performed
on Trunk 0 or Trunk 1
DCH
Bicolor Red/Green LED NTBK51AA status
The following is a brief description of each element on the faceplate:
Enable/Disable Switch
This switch is used to disable the card prior to insertion or removal from
the network shelf; while this switch is in disable position, the card will not
respond to system CPU.
Port Out of Service LEDs
Two red LEDs indicate if the "ENET0" and "ENET1" portion of the card are
disabled. These LEDs are lit in the following cases:
•
•
•
When the enable/disable switch is in state disable (lit by hardware)
After power-up, before the card is enabled
When the ENET port on the card is disabled by software.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 63
Trunk Port Disable LEDs
Two red LEDs indicate if the "trunk port 0" and "trunk port 1" portion of the
card are disabled. These LEDs are turned on in the following cases:
•
•
•
When the enable/disable switch is in state disable (lit by hardware).
After power-up, before the card is enabled.
When digital trunk interface on the card is deactivated by software.
ACT LEDs
Two green LEDs indicate if the "trunk port 0" and "trunk port 1" portion
of the card is active.
RED LEDs
Two red LEDs indicate if the near end detects absence of incoming signal
or loss of synchronization in "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1" respectively.
The Near End Alarm causes a Far End Alarm signal to be transmitted to
the far end.
YEL LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if a Far End Alarm has been reported by the far
end (usually in response to a Near End Alarm condition at the far end)
on "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1".
LBK LEDs
Two green LEDs indicate the remote loopback test is being performed on
trunk port 0 or trunk port 1. The loopback indication is active when the
digital trunk is in remote loopback mode (T1 signals received from the far
end are regenerated and transmitted to the far end.) Normal call processing
is inhibited during remote loopback test.
DCH LED
A dual color red/green LED indicates that the onboard DDCH is present
but disabled (red), or is present and enabled (green). If a DDCH is not
configured on the DDP card, this lamp is not lit.
Port 0 Clk Connectors
Two RJ11 connectors for connecting:
•
•
Digital trunk port 0 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 0.
Digital trunk port 0 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 1.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
64 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Port 1 Clk Connectors
Two RJ11 connectors for connecting:
•
•
Digital trunk port 1 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 0.
Digital trunk port 1 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 1.
Connector J5 (TRK)
A 9 pin D-Type connector used to connect:
•
•
Digital trunk port 0 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs.
Digital trunk port 1 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs.
Connector J6 (DCH)
A 26 pin D-type connector, used to connect the DDP card to MSDL or
QPC757 external D-channel handlers.
System capacity and performance
Physical capacity
Each DDP card occupies one slot on the network shelf. It supports two
digital trunk circuits and two network loops. The total number of DDP cards
per system is limited by the number of network loops, physical capacity of
the shelf, number of DTI/PRI interfaces allowed by the software and the
range of DCH addresses.
D-Channel capacity
The software configuration for the NTBK51AA DDCH is similar to the MSDL.
It is both physical and logical, and supports D-Channel functionality only.
The system has a total capacity of 16 addresses (Device Addresses or
DNUM) that can be reserved for DCHI card, MSDL card or DDCH card. One
exception is DNUM 0 which is commonly assigned to the System Monitor.
No two different D-Channel providers can share the same DNUM. Hence,
the combined maximum number of DCHI, MSDL and DDCH cards in the
system is 16.
The DCHI and DDCH have two D-Channel units, the MSDL has four.
Therefore the total number of D-Channels is derived by the following formula:
Total_Num_DCH-Units = Num_DCHIx2 + Num_DDCHx2 + Num_MSDLx4
Therefore, Total_Num_DCH-Units in any given system is between 0-63.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 65
CPU capacity
Using a NT512 DDP card instead of DTI/PRI cards does not increase
the load on the system CPU. The DDP replaces an ENET card and two
DTI/PRI cards, it emulates the ENET card and the overall CPU capacity is
not impacted by usage of DDP card instead of a DTI/PRI card.
Power requirements
for the DDP card.
Table 17
DDP power requirements
Voltage
Source
Current
DDP (without
NTBK51AA)
DDP (with
NTBK51AA)
+5V
Backplane
3A
3.8A
+12V
-12V
Backplane
Backplane
25mA
25mA
15.6W
75mA
75mA
20.8W
Total Power (Maximum)
Testability and diagnostics
The DDP card supports all current QPC720 testing and maintenance
functions through the following procedures:
•
•
•
Self test upon power up or reset;
Signaling test performed in the LD 30;
Loopback tests, self tests, and continuity tests performed by LD 60 and
LD 45;
•
The D-Channel (MSDL, DCHI, DDCH) maintenance is supported by
LD 96.
NT5D12 Cable requirements
This section lists the types of cable used and the lengths required for
internal and external NT5D12 DDP connections.
Note 1: No additional cabling is required for nB+D configurations.
Multiple DDPs and the D-channel are associated through software in
LD 17.
Note 2: A detailed discussion of each type of DDP cable listed below
follows.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
New DDP cable assemblies include:
•
System Trunk Tip/Ring Cables
— NT5D16AA
— NT5D17AA
— QCAD133
•
DDP to QPC471/QPC775 Clock Controller Cables
— NTCG03AA
— NTCG03AB
— NTCG03AC
— NTCG03AD
•
•
DDP to DCHI cables
— NTCK46AA
— NTCK46AB
— NTCK46AC
— NTCK46AD
DDP to MSDL cables
— NTCK80AA
— NTCK80AB
— NTCK80AC
— NTCK80AD
Trunk Tip/Ring cables
NT5D16AA
The NT5D16AA (8 ft.) is a 100W cable for systems equipped with an I/O
filter panel, connecting the 9 pin D-type TRK port on the DDP faceplate
to the I/O filter.
Note: On the I/O panel side, this cable is equipped with a monitor
bantam plug and a 15 pin D-type trunk connector mounted on a small
PCB. There are no bantam plugs on the DDP faceplate.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 67
Figure 25
NT5D16AA
NT5D16AA cable.
Table 18
NT5D16AA cable pins
DDP
I/O Panel
Cable
Name
Description
Color
pins (J5)
pins (J2, J3)
0
T-PRI0TX
Trunk 0 Transmit Tip
Black
J5-1
J5-2
J5-3
J5-4
P0J3-1
P0J2-3
0
0
0
R-PRI0TX
T-PRI0RX
R-PRI0RX
Trunk 0 Transmit Ring
Trunk 0 Receive Tip
Trunk 0 Receive Ring
Red
P0J3-9
P0J2-9
Black
White
P0J3-3
P0J2-4
P0J3-11
P0J2-10
0
0
1
GND Shield Wire
GND Shield Wire
Trunk 1 Transmit Tip
Bare
Bare
Black
N/C
N/C
J5-5
Case P0
Case P0
T-PRI1TX
R-PRI1TX
T-PRI1RX
P1J3-1
P1J2-3
1
1
Trunk 1 Transmit Ring
Trunk 1 Receive Tip
Red
J5-6
J5-7
P1J3-9
P1J2-9
Black
P1J3-3
P1J2-4
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
DDP
I/O Panel
Cable
Name
Description
Color
pins (J5)
pins (J2, J3)
1
R-PRI1RX
Trunk 1 Receive Ring
White
J5-8
P1J3-11
P1J2-10
1
1
GND Shield Wire
GND Shield Wire
Bare
Bare
N/C
N/C
Case P1
Case P1
Reference clock cables
The NTCG03AA (14 ft.), NTCG03AB (2.8 ft.), NTCG03AC (4.0 ft.), or
NTCG03AD (7 ft.) is a DDP card to Clock Controller cable, connecting
each of the CLK0 or CLK1 ports on the DDP faceplate to the primary or
secondary source ports on Clock Controller card 0 or 1.
Figure 26
NTCG03AA, NTCG03AB, NTCG03AC, or NTCG03AD
MSDL/DCHI cables
External DCHI cable
The NTCK46 cable connects the DDP card to the QPC757 DCHI D-Channel
Handler card. The cable is available in four different sizes:
•
•
•
•
NTCK46AA (6 ft.) - DDP to DCHI cable
NTCK46AB (18 ft.) - DDP to DCHI cable
NTCK46AC (35 ft.) - DDP to DCHI cable
NTCK46AD (50 ft.) - DDP to DCHI cable
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 69
Figure 27
NTCK46AA, NTCK46AB, NTCK46AC, NTCK46AD
External MSDL cable
The NTCK80 cable connects the DDP card to the NT6D80 MSDL card. The
cable is available in four different sizes:
•
•
•
•
NTCK80AA (6 ft.) - DDP to MSDL cable
NTCK80AB (18 ft.) - DDP to MSDL cable
NTCK80AC (35 ft.) - DDP to MSDL cable
NTCK80AD (50 ft.) - DDP to MSDL cable
Figure 28
NTCK80AA, NTCK80AB, NTCK80AC, NTCK80AD
Cable diagrams
example of a typical cabling configuration for the DDP. Please note that
these figures are representational only, and are not intended to show the
relational card slot position of the various cards.
a typical DDP cabling for a system Option with an I/O panel, with the
connection between the I/O panel and a Network Channel Terminating
Equipment (NCTE).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Note: Since there exists several clock cabling options, none has been
represented in the diagram. Please refer to "Clock configurations" (page
Figure 29
DDP cable for systems with an I/O panel
Clock
There are two types of clock operation - tracking mode and free-run mode.
Tracking mode
In tracking mode, the DDP loop supplies an external clock reference to a
clock controller. Two DDP loops can operate in tracking mode, with one
defined as the primary reference source for clock synchronization, the other
defined as the secondary reference source. The secondary reference acts
as a back-up to the primary reference.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 71
(page 71), a system with dual CPUs can have two clock controllers (CC-0
and CC-1). One clock controller acts as a back-up to the other. Lock the
clock controllers to the reference clock.
Figure 30
Clock Controller primary and secondary tracking
Free run (non-tracking) mode
The clock synchronization of the system can operate in free-run mode if:
•
•
•
no loop is defined as the primary or secondary clock reference,
the primary and secondary references are disabled, or
the primary and secondary references are in local (near end) alarm.
Reference clock errors
The system software checks at intervals of 1 to 15 minutes to see if a clock
controller or reference-clock error has occurred. (The interval of this check
can be configured in LD 73.)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
In tracking mode, at any one time, there is one active clock controller which
is tracking on one reference clock. If a clock controller error is detected, the
system switches to the back-up clock controller, without affecting which
reference clock is being tracked.
A reference-clock error occurs when there is a problem with the clock driver
or with the reference clock at the far end. If the clock controller detects a
reference-clock error, the reference clocks are switched.
Automatic clock recovery
A command for automatic clock recovery can be selected in LD 60 with
the command EREF.
A DDP loop is disabled when it enters a local-alarm condition. If the local
alarm is cleared, the loop is enabled automatically. When the loop is
enabled, clock tracking is restored in the following conditions:
•
If the loop is assigned as the primary reference clock but the clock
controller is tracking on the secondary reference or in free-run mode, it
is restored to tracking on primary.
•
•
If the loop is assigned as the secondary reference clock but the clock
controller is in free-run mode, it is restored to tracking on secondary.
If the clock check indicates the switch is in free-run mode:
— Tracking is restored to the primary reference clock if defined.
— If the primary reference is disabled or in local alarm, tracking is
restored to the secondary reference clock if defined.
Note: If the system is put into free-run mode by the craftsperson,
it resumes tracking on a reference clock unless the clock-switching
option is disabled (LD 60, command MREF), or the reference clock is
"undefined" in the database.
Automatic clock switching
If the EREF command is selected in LD 60, tracking on the primary or
secondary reference clock is automatically switched in the following manner:
•
If software is unable to track on the assigned primary reference clock, it
switches to the secondary reference clock and sends appropriate DTC
maintenance messages.
•
If software is unable to track on the assigned secondary reference clock,
it switches to free run.
Clock configurations
Clock Controllers can be used in a single or a dual CPU system.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 73
A single CPU system has one Clock Controller card. This card can receive
reference clocks from two sources referred to as the primary and secondary
sources. These two sources can originate from a PRI, DTI, etc. PRI cards
such as the QPC720 are capable of supplying two references of the same
clock source. These are known as Ref1 (available at J1) and Ref2 (available
at J2) on the QPC720.
The NT5D12 card is capable of supplying two references from each clock
source, i.e., four references in total. NT5D12 can thus supply Clk0 and Clk1
from Port 0 and Clk0 and Clk1 from Port 1. Either Port 0 or Port 1 can
originate the primary source, as shown in Figure 31 "Clock Controller -
There is one new Clock Controller cable required for the new DDP card,
which is available in four sizes; this is the NTCG03AA/AB/AC/AD. Refer to
"Reference clock cables" (page 68) for more information.
20 "Clock Controller options - description" (page 74) explains the options in
more detail.
Table 19
Clock Controller options- summary
CC Option
CPU Type
Notes
Option 1
Single
Ref from P0 on Clk0
Ref from P1 on Clk0
Ref from P0 on Clk0
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
Dual
Dual
Dual
Ref from P0 on Clk1
Ref from P1 on Clk0
Ref from P1 on Clk1
Ref from P0 on Clk0
Ref from P0 on Clk1
Ref from P1 on Clk0
Ref from P1 on Clk1
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Table 20
Clock Controller options - description
Clock Option Notes
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
Option 4
This option provides a single CPU system with 2 clock sources
derived from the 2 ports of the DDP.
Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Port 0.
Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Port 1.
This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references of a
clock source derived from port 0 of the DDP.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Port 0.
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Port 0.
This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references of a
clock source derived from port 1 of the DDP.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Port 1.
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Port 1.
This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references from
each clock source derived from the DDP.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Port 0.
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Port 0.
Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Port 1.
Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Port 1.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 75
Figure 31
Clock Controller - Option 1
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 32
Clock Controller - Option 2
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI 77
Figure 33
Clock Controller - Option 3
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78 ISDN Primary Rate Interface equipment overview
Figure 34
Clock Controller - Option 4
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
79
DCH installation
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
Install the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH
Installation procedures for the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, and NT6D11AE
DCHI cards are the same for all Large Systems. These instructions apply to
hardware both for primary and backup D-channels. D-channel lines must be
conditioned for 64K before D-channels can be brought up.
Note: To configure J1, the asynchronous port on the DCHI card, refer
to the documentation of the application being interfaced, and to Circuit
Card Reference (NN43001-311). J1 configuration is not described in
this technical document.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80 DCH installation
Set up the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI
DIP switch settings
The NT6D11AB/AE/AF has three sets of DIP switches. Each port has its
own bank of 10 DIP switches (SW1 & SW2) to select the port address (8
bits) and mode of operation (2 bits). SW1 is used for port 0 settings, SW2 is
used for port 1 settings. SW3 is used to select the D-channel protocol. Port
0 is used to select whether the asynchronous ESDI port is be disabled or
not. Port 1 is used to select the standard or expanded D-channel addressing
mode on the NT6D11AB/AE/AF.
The DIP switches are located as shown by Figure 35 "NT6D11 DIP
Figure 35
NT6D11 DIP switches
Protocol selection
Note: The setting must be 1 for ISDN applications.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set up the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI 81
Table 21
Protocol selection switch settings
Protocol
Switch Setting
SW3.1
SW3.2
0
1
0
1
DPNSS1
ISDN
Valid switch combinations
The following are the only allowable switch setting combinations (not
including address switch settings).
Port 0
Port 0 can be configured as asynchronous ESDI, or disabled. If the port is
configured as disabled, it will not be visible to the system CPU. Refer to
Table 22
Port 0 settings
Mode
Switch setting
SW1.1
SW1.2
SW3.1
SW3.2
Asynchronous ESDI
Asynchronous ESDI
Port disabled
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
-
0
1
-
Port 1
The following are the only valid emulation mode combinations. If the port
is configured as disabled, it will not be visible to the system CPU. Refer to
Note: The ISDN emulation must be selected.
Table 23
Port 1 settings
Mode
Emulates
Switch setting
SW2.1
SW2.2
SW3.1
SW3.2
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
DPNSS1
ISDN
NT5K35
NT6D11
NT5K75
Expanded
DPNSS1
-
-
1
1
Port disabled
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82 DCH installation
Jumper settings
The NT6D11AB/AE/AF has two banks of option straps, one for each port.
These select between DCE and DTE operation and whether the signalling
Figure 36
NT6D11 DCH with ISL high-speed programming jumper settings
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set up the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI 83
Figure 37
NT6D11 DCH with ISL low-speed programming jumper settings
Port addressing modes
Port 0 Mode selection
Port 0 is used to select whether the asynchronous ESDI port is be disabled
Note: The asynchronous ESDI port must be set to "disabled".
Table 24
Port 0 mode selection
Port Mode
Switch Setting
SW1.1
SW1.2
-
0
1
1
Not used
0
1
Asynchronous ESDI
Port disabled
Port 1 mode selection
Port 1 is used to select the standard or expanded D-channel addressing
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84 DCH installation
Table 25
Port 1 mode selection
Port Mode
Switch Setting
SW2.2
SW2.1
0
0
Synchronous, D-channel, standard addressing
Note: THIS SELECTION MUST BE MADE FOR
ISDN.
0
1
1
1
0
1
Synchronous, D-channel, expanded addressing
Not used
Port disabled
Port address switch settings
Port address switch settings in the standard mode, for ISDN
address switch settings that apply to SW1 or SW2, the D-channel port,
for ISDN mode.
Table 26
Port address switch settings for ISDN
Port Address
Switch Setting
Device No.
Half Group No.
S3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
S4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
S5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
S6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
S7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
S8
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
S9
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
S10
x
0
1
x
x
2
x
3
x
4
5
x
x
6
7
x
x
8
x
9
x
10
11
12
13
x
x
x
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI 85
Port Address
Switch Setting
Device No.
Half Group No.
S3
0
S4
0
S5
0
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
x
14
15
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
16-31
32-47
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
48-63
64-79
80-95
96-111
112-127
Install the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI
(page 85) to install the NT6D11 DCH on the Large System.
Procedure 1
Install the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH
Step Action
1
Determine the cabinet and shelf location for the circuit pack being
installed.
The NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, or NT6D11AF DCHI card can be
installed in any slot appropriate for an I/O port card on a Network
shelf. (The NT6D11 DCHI card can be located on the Common
Equipment shelf only on single-CPU switches.)
2
3
Unpack and inspect the card.
Set the option switches on the DCHI card. For PRA capability, set
port J2 to odd. For ISL capability, set port J2 for high speed or low
speed operation (See Figure 36 "NT6D11 DCH with ISL high-speed
4
Set faceplate toggle switch to DISABLE.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86 DCH installation
5
6
Install the DCHI card into the assigned shelf and slot.
Connect DCHI port J2 to the NT8D72AB or NT8D72BA PRI port J5
with a QCAD328A cable.
7
8
Set faceplate toggle switch to ENABLE.
Coordinate the start-up and verification of the DCHI with the start-up
of the PRI.
9
Enable the DCHI card using LD 96, command ENL DCHI N.
—End—
Remove the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH
(page 86) to remove the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH from
a Large System.
CAUTION
The NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH must be software
disabled before it is hardware disabled, or initialization will occur.
Procedure 2
Remove the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCH
Step Action
1
2
3
Disable the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI using LD 96,
command DIS DCHI N.
If asynchronous port J1 is enabled, it must also be software disabled,
using LD 37, or initialization will occur.
If the circuit pack is being completely removed, not replaced, remove
data from memory.
4
5
6
7
8
Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the card to be removed.
Set faceplate toggle switch to DISABLE.
Disconnect NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI cables.
Remove NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE, NT6D11AF DCHI card.
Pack and store the card.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install the QPC757 DCH 87
—End—
Install the QPC757 DCH
Installation procedures for the QPC757 DCHI card are the same for all Large
Systems. These procedures apply to both primary and backup D-channels.
"D-channel port address switch settings for PRI" (page 89), for option switch
settings per port number of the DCHI card, in Primary Rate Interface mode.
QPC757 DCHI card on Large Systems.
Procedure 3
Install the QPC757 DCHI
Step Action
1
Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the circuit card to be
installed.
The QPC757 DCHI card can be installed in any slot appropriate
for an I/O port card on a network shelf. For single CPU systems
only, the QPC757 DCHI card can be located on the Common
Equipment (CE) shelf.
2
3
Unpack and inspect the card.
Set option switches and jumper plugs on the DCHI card. For PRI
capability, set port J2 to odd. For ISL capability, set port J2 for
high-speed or low-speed programming.
4
5
6
Set faceplate toggle switch to DISABLE.
Install DCHI card into the assigned shelf or module and slot.
Run and connect DCHI cables: connect QPC757 J2 to QPC720
PRI J5 with a QCAD328A cable.
7
8
9
Set faceplate toggle switch to ENABLE.
Enable the loop in LD 60.
Coordinate start-up and verification of the DCHI with the start-up
of the PRI.
10
Enable the DCHI card using LD 96, command ENL DCH x.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88 DCH installation
—End—
Figure 38
QPC757 option and PRI/ISL high-speed programming switch settings
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install the QPC757 DCH 89
Figure 39
QPC757 option and PRI/ISL low-speed programming switch settings
Port address switch settings
the port address switch settings that apply to SW1, SW2 (the D-channel
port), SW3, and SW4.
Table 27
D-channel port address switch settings for PRI
Port Address Switch Settings
Port Number
J1
0
J2
1
SW1
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
SW2
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
SW3
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
SW4
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
2
2
5
4
7
6
8
9
10
12
14
11
13
15
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90 DCH installation
D-channel parameter downloading
The system software automatically downloads new parameters to each
D-channel Interface (DCHI) circuit card upon SYSLOAD. When this occurs,
the D-channel is temporarily disabled and then automatically reenabled.
Three situations require manual disabling and enabling of each DCHI to
ensure parameter downloading:
•
•
Performing a parallel load and switching over to the second CPU
Following an alarm condition for the T1 loop carrying the D-channel (but
the D-channel is still operational)
•
Following SYSLOAD when using ISDN Signaling Link (ISL)
Remove the QPC757 DCHI
QPC757 DCHI card from Large Systems.
CAUTION
The QPC757 DCH must be software disabled before it is hardware
disabled to prevent initialization
Procedure 4
Remove the QPC757 DCH
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Disable the QPC757 DCHI using LD 96, command DIS DCH x.
Disable asynchronous port J1 in LD 48 to prevent initialization.
Disable loop in LD 60.
If the circuit card is being removed, not replaced, remove data from
memory.
5
6
7
8
9
Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the card to be removed.
Set faceplate toggle switch to DISABLE.
Disconnect QPC757 DCHI cables.
Remove QPC757 DCHI card.
Pack and store circuit card.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
91
NTBK51 DDCH installation and removal
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Introduction
This chapter provides installation and removal procedures for the NTBK51
Downloadable D-channel Daughterboard, the NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2
card, and the NT5D12 dual-port 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card on all Large Systems.
Note: The only version of the NTBK51 DDCH that can be used on an
NT5D97, or NT5D12 installed on a Large System, is the NTBK51AA.
Vintage NTBK51BA cannot be used, due to a different pin configuration
(the NTBK51BA is used on Small Systems.)
Before beginning an installation:
•
Consult the Spares Planning (NN3001-253) document and follow the
instructions.
•
•
Bring spares of all cables and boards.
Remember that test procedures require a 24-hour minimum bit error-rate
testing before being used.
•
Remember that either the DDCH, the MSDL, or NT5D97, or NT5D12
card can be installed first. However, NT5D97 PRI2 loops, and NT5D12
PRI loops, must be configured in software before defining DCH links.
Install NTBK51 DDCH on NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card
Installation procedures for the NTBK51 DDCH are the same for all Large
DTI2/PRI2 card" (page 92) below.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92 NTBK51 DDCH installation and removal
The DDCH can be mounted on any NT5D97 DDP2 card. Set the address
for the DDCH (see the switch settings section to set the address). If a
DDCH is present on a DDP2 card then an external D-channel should not be
connected to J6. If a DDCH is present the LED "DDCH" lights up.
CAUTION
The static discharge bracelet located inside the cabinet must be
worn before handling circuit cards. Failure to wear the bracelet
can result in damage to the circuit cards.
Procedure 5
Install the NTBK51 on the NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card
Step Action
1
2
Unpack and inspect the DDCH daughterboard.
The DDCH comes with four standoffs so that it can be mounted
onto the NT5D97. These are easily pushed into four corresponding
mounting holes on the DDP2.
Mount the DDCH so that it mates with P1 and P2 on the NT5D97
motherboard.
Note: P 1 and P 2 contain (40+30) sockets as the NTBK51AA
respective pins (40+30), which enables the technician to "mate"
them. This is applicable for the NT5D97AA/AB. The NT5D97AD
has 44+34 sockets. In order to place the NTBK51AA (40+30
pins), place the NTBK51AA inside P1 and P2. Start from their
lower edge. (The remaining "free" sockets (4+4) in P1 and P2
are in their upper edge.)
3
Set the DDP2 ENB/DIS faceplate switch to Enable (ON). The DDCH
LED then flashes three times.
—End—
Remove NTBK51 DDCH from NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card
Removal procedures for the NTBK51 DDCH are the same for all Large
Systems.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install NTBK51 DDCH on NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI 93
CAUTION
A static discharge bracelet must be worn before handling circuit
cards. Failure to wear the bracelet can result in damage to the
circuit cards.
The NTBK51 can only be removed when it is disabled in software. Both
ports of the associated DDP2 card must be disabled. Follow the steps in
card" (page 93) to remove the NTBK51 from the NT5D97 dual-port
DTI2/PRI2 card.
Procedure 6
Remove the NTBK51 from the NT5D97 dual-port DTI2/PRI2 card
Step Action
1
2
Set the DDP2 ENB/DIS faceplate switch to Disable (OFF).
Remove the DDP2 and the DDCH.
—End—
Install NTBK51 DDCH on NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI
Installation procedures for the NTBK51 DDCH are the same for all Large
Systems.
Set the address for the DDCH (see the switch settings section to set the
address). If a DDCH is present on a DDP card then an external D-channel
should not be connected to J6. If a DDCH is present, the LED "DCH"
lights up.
CAUTION
Service Interruption
A static discharge bracelet must be worn before handling circuit
cards. Failure to wear the bracelet can result in damage to the
circuit cards.
The DDCH can be mounted on any DDP card. Follow the steps in
(page 94) to install the NTBK51 on the NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI card.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94 NTBK51 DDCH installation and removal
Procedure 7
Install the NTBK51 DDCH on the NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI
Step Action
1
2
Unpack and inspect the DDCH daughterboard.
The DDCH comes with four standoffs so that it can be mounted onto
the DDP. These are easily pushed into four corresponding mounting
holes on the DDP.
Mount the NTBK51 DDCH so that it mates correctly with P1 and P2
on the NT5D12 DDP motherboard.
—End—
Remove NTBK51 DDCH from NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI
Removal procedures for the NTBK51 DDCH are the same for all Large
Systems.
CAUTION
A static discharge bracelet must be worn before handling circuit
cards. Failure to wear the bracelet can result in damage to the
circuit cards.
The DDCH can only be removed when it is disabled in software. Both ports
of the associated DDP card must be disabled. Follow the steps in Procedure
Procedure 8
Remove the NTBK51 from the NT5D12 dual-port DTI/PRI card
Step Action
1
2
Disable the faceplate switch on the DDP.
Remove the DDP and DDCH.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
95
MSDL installation for all systems
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
Install the MSDL
Installation procedures for the MSDL card are the same for Large Systems.
The MSDL card goes into the following slots:
Half Group,
Single Group
CPU/Network Module slot 1–8, 13
Network Module slot 5–14
Multi Group
Refer to Software Input Output Reference — System Messages
(NN43001-712) and Circuit Card Reference (NN43001-311) for more
information.
Procedure 9
Install the MSDL card
Step Action
1
2
Determine module and slot location for the MSDL card. Unpack and
inspect the MSDL card.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96 MSDL installation for all systems
3
4
Insert the MSDL card into the selected card slot of the module
following the card guides.
Observe the red LED on the MSDL faceplate. If it turns on, flashes
three times, and stays on continuously, the MSDL is operating
correctly but is not yet enabled.
If the LED turns on and stays on continuously without flashing
three times, the card can be defective. Go to step 8.
5
Connect the appropriate cable between the NT6D80 and the PRI
card MSDL interface.
6
7
Enable the MSDL card in LD96.
Unplug the MSDL card and reinsert it. If the red LED still does
not flash three times, leave the card installed for approximately 10
minutes to allow the card to be initialized.
8
After 10 minutes unplug the card, reinsert it and if the card still does
not flash three times, the card is defective and must be replaced.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install the MSDL 97
Figure 40
MSDL card layout
Table 28
MSDL switch settings
Port 0—SW4
Port 0—SW8
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
RS-232-D
ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
RS-422-A DTE
ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
RS-422-A DCE
ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
Port 1—SW3
Port 1—SW7
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
RS-232-D
ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
RS-422-A DTE
ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98 MSDL installation for all systems
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
RS-422-A DCE
ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
Port 2—SW2
Port 2—SW6
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
RS-232-D
ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
RS-422-A DTE
ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
RS-422-A DCE
RS-232-D
ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
Port 3—SW1
Port 3—SW5
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
RS-422-A DTE
RS-422-A DCE
ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
n
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff ff
Replace the MSDL
Replacement procedures for the MSDL card are the same for all Large
Procedure 10
Replace the MSDL card
Step Action
1
2
3
4
5
Disable the MSDL card in LD 96.
Disconnect MSDL to PRI cables.
Remove the faulty MSDL card.
Unpack and inspect the new MSDL card.
6
7
Insert the new MSDL card into the selected card slot of the module
following the card guides.
Observe the red LED on the MSDL faceplate. If it turns on, flashes
three times, and stays on continuously, the MSDL is operating
correctly but is not yet enabled.
If the LED turns on and stays on continuously without flashing
three times, the card can be defective. Go to step 11.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replace the MSDL 99
8
Connect the appropriate cable between the NT6D80 and the PRI
card MSDL interface.
9
Enable the MSDL card in LD 96.
10
Unplug the MSDL card and reinsert it. If the red LED still does
not flash three times, leave the card installed for approximately 10
minutes to allow the card to be initialized.
11
After 10 minutes unplug the card and reinsert it. If the red LED does
not flash three times, the card is defective and must be replaced.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100 MSDL installation for all systems
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
101
NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card
installation
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
Introduction
This chapter contains information on how to install the 2.0 Mb NT8D72 and
the 1.5 Mb QPC720 PRI cards on all Large Systems.
Information on how to install the dual-port cards NT5D97 and NT5D12 is
contained in this document.
PRI circuit pack locations
The PRI circuit pack occupies two adjacent slots on a shelf. As many as
five circuit packs can be plugged into an empty Network shelf, along with a
Power Converter circuit pack. Specific locations will depend on available
space.
Note 1: Due to physical width, Bus Terminating Units (BTUs) and PRIs
cannot fit next to each other on a shelf.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Note 2: This chapter includes instructions for installing an additional
network shelf on a system (when no vacant Network slots are available
to install PRI packs, additional network shelves can replace Intelligent
Peripheral Equipment shelves located on the rear of the Common
Cable requirements
Shielded 22 AWG (0.644 mm) cables are recommended for connecting
the PRI to the crossconnect point. This cable consists of two twisted-pair
conductors.
The transmit and the receive pairs must be enclosed in a polyvinyl jacket.
This type of cable is commonly referred to as "6-conductor" cable. The
cable should be grounded at the crossconnect point.
In addition to twisted-pair conductors, 75-ohm coaxial cable can also be
used to provide connection to the office repeater or line terminating unit
(LTU).
For manufacture cables of lengths different than those of the standard
cables provided, see "Nonstandard cables" on "Nonstandard cables" (page
For the 2.0 Mb NT8D72 PRI card, see Figure 41 "NT8D72(Half Group
Group and Single Group cabling arrangements applying to the system; also,
For the 2.0 NT8D72 on a Multi Group arrangement, see Figure 45 "NT8D72
For the 1.5 Mb QPC720 PRI card on Half Group and Single Group systems,
PRI card for Half and Multi Group systems" (page 117). For the QPC720 on
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cable requirements 103
Multi Group systems, see Figure 51 "QPC720 Multi Group cabling without
Figure 41
NT8D72(Half Group cabling) on Half and Single Group systems without an echo canceller
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Figure 42
NT8D72 (Half Group cabling) for Half and Single Group systems, with an echo canceller
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cable requirements 105
Figure 43
NT8D72 (Single Group cabling) for Half and Single Group systems, without an echo canceller
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Figure 44
NT8D72 (Single Group cabling) for Half and Single Group systems, with an echo canceller
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cable requirements 107
Figure 45
NT8D72 (Multi Group cabling) for Multi Group systems without an echo canceller
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Figure 46
NT8D72 (Multi Group cabling) for Multi Group systems with an echo canceller
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cable requirements 109
Figure 47
QPC720 (Half Group cabling) for Multi Group systems without an echo canceller
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Figure 48
QPC720 (Half Group cabling) for Multi Group systems with an echo canceller
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cable requirements 111
Figure 49
QPC720 (Single Group cabling) for Multi Group systems without an echo canceller
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Figure 50
QPC720 (Single Group cabling) for Multi Group systems with an echo canceller
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cable requirements 113
Figure 51
QPC720 Multi Group cabling without an echo canceller
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Figure 52
QPC720 Multi Group cabling with an echo canceller
Table 29
Cable for the NT8D72 PRI card for Half and Single Group systems
Cable
From
Des
Con
J5
To
MSDL
Des
Con
To
NTND26
PRI card
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cable requirements 115
Cable
From
Des
Con
J1
To
Des
Con
J2
To
NT8D79AA
PRI card
Clock contro
ller
CC-0
Only when
primary
clock source.
NT8D79AA
PRI card
J1
Clock contro
ller
CC-0
J1
Only when
secondary
clock source.
For single-group only
NT8D79AA
PRI card
J2
J2
Clock contro
ller
CC-1
CC-1
CC-1
J2
J1
J3
Only when
primary
clock source.
NT8D79AA
PRI card
Clock contro
ller
Only when
secondary
clock source.
QCAD125
Clock contro CC-0
ller
J3
J3
Clock contro
ller
Clock Contro
ller back-up.
NT8D85AB
PRI card
Network
Run directly
to Network
pack.
QCAD328A
PRI card
J2
DCHI
J2
Run directly
to DCHI
card.
NTND26
NT8D7207
RS-232
PRI card
PRI card
I/O Panel
J5
J4
MSDL
I/O Panel
Echo cancell
er
RS-232
PRI card
I/O Panel
J6
Echo cancell
er
cross conne
ct
NT8D7205
Run via
cabinet I/O
panel to cro
ssconnect
terminal from
switch.
Note: No additional cabling is required for multiple PRIs. The D-channel
is associated through software in LD 17 (prompt PRI).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Table 30
Cable for the NT8D72 PRI card for Multi Group systems
From
Des.
To
Des.
Notes
Cable
Con.
Con.
1
QCAD130
PRI card
J1
Clock contro CC-0
ller
2
1
2
3
QCAD130
QCAD130
QCAD130
QCAD110
QCAD110
PRI card
PRI card
PRI card
J1
J2
J2
Clock contro CC-0
ller
Clock contro CC-1
ller
Clock contro CC-1
ller
Clock contro CC-0
ller
J3
J3
Junctor
board
JCTR
J11
Clock contro CC-1
ller
Junctor
board
JCTR
J12
4
5
QCAD124
QCAD328A
NTND26
PRI card
PRI card
J3
J5
Network
DCHI card
MSDL
J2
PRI card
PRI card
I/O Panel
PRI card
I/O Panel
J5
6
6
6
QCAD128
QCAD133
QCAD129
RS-232
J4
J6
I/O Panel
Patch Panel
I/O Panel
Echo Cance
ller
7
RS-232
PRI card
J6
Echo Cance
ller
Note 1: Only when primary clock source.
Note 2: Only when secondary clock source.
Note 3: multigroup junctor board connection.
Note 4: Run to connector on network pack.
Note 5: Run directly to DCHI card.
Note 6: Run by means of cabinet I/O panel to CSU, echo canceller, or cross connect terminal.
Note 7: Run by means of cabinet I/O panel to crossconnect terminal or echo canceller from non
shielded system.
Note 8: No additional cabling is required for multiple PRIs. The D-channel is associated through
software in LD17, prompt PRI.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cable requirements 117
From
Des.
To
Des.
Notes
Cable
Con.
J4
Con.
7
7
QCAD133
RS-232
PRI card
PRI card
Patch Panel
J6
Echo Cance
ller
Note 1: Only when primary clock source.
Note 2: Only when secondary clock source.
Note 3: multigroup junctor board connection.
Note 4: Run to connector on network pack.
Note 5: Run directly to DCHI card.
Note 6: Run by means of cabinet I/O panel to CSU, echo canceller, or cross connect terminal.
Note 7: Run by means of cabinet I/O panel to crossconnect terminal or echo canceller from non
shielded system.
Note 8: No additional cabling is required for multiple PRIs. The D-channel is associated through
software in LD17, prompt PRI.
Table 31
Cable for the QPC720 PRI card for Half and Multi Group systems
Cable
From
Des.
Con. To
Des.
Con. Comments
For half group only
QCAD130
NT8D79xx
QPC720
J1
J1
QPC471/
QPC775
CC-0
J2
J1
Only when
primary clock
source.
QCAD130
NT8D79xx
QPC720
QPC720
QPC471/
QPC775
CC-0
Only when
secondary clock
source.
NTND26
J5
J2
NT6D80
For single group only
QCAD130
NT8D79xx
QPC720
QPC471/
QPC775
CC-1
CC-1
CC-1
J2
J1
J3
Only when
primary clock
source.
QCAD130
NT8D79xx
QPC720
J2
J3
QPC471/
QPC775
Only when
secondary clock
source.
QCAD125
NT8D75xx
QPC471/ CC-0
QPC775
QPC471/
QPC775
Clock controller
back-up.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Cable
From
Des.
Con. To
Des.
Con. Comments
QCAD124
NT8D85xx
QPC720
J3
J5
J5
Network
Run directly to
network card.
QCAD328A
QPC720
QPC757
J2
Run directly to
DCHI card.
NTND26
QPC720
I/O Panel
NT6D80
QCAD133
Patch panel
Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
CSU, Echo
Canceller, or
cross connect
terminal.
QCAD129
RS-232
QPC720
I/O Panel
J6
I/O Panel
Echo Canc
eller
RS-232
QPC720
QPC720
J6
J4
Echo Canc
eller
QCAD133
NT8D83xx
Patch panel
Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
crossconnect
terminal or Echo
Canceller from
non-shielded
system.
Table 32
Cable for the QPC720 PRI card on Multi Group systems
Cable
From
Des.
Con.
To
Des.
Con.
Notes
QCAD130
NT8D79xx
QPC720
J1
QPC47 CC-0
1
QCP77
5
Only when
primary clock
source
QCAD130
NT8D79xx
QPC720
QPC720
J1
J2
QPC47 CC-0
1
QCP77
5
Only when
secondary clock
source
QCAD130
NT8D79xx
QPC47 CC-1
1
QCP77
5
Only when
primary clock
source
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cable requirements 119
Cable
From
Des.
Con.
To
Des.
Con.
Notes
QCAD130
NT8D79xx
QPC720
J2
QPC47 CC-1
1
QCP77
5
Only when
secondary clock
source
QCAD110
NT8D74xx
QPC471
QCP775
CC-0
CC-1
J3
QPC417
JCTR
JCTR
J11
J12
multigroup
junctor board
connection
QCAD110
NT8D74xx
QPC471
QCP775
J3
J3
QPC417
Network
QCAD124
NT8D85xx
QPC720
Run to connec
tor on network
pack
QCAD328
NTND26
QPC720
J5
QPC757
NT6D80
J2
Run directly to
DCHI card
QPC720
QPC720
J5
J4
QCAD128
NT8D83xx
I/O
Panel
Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
CSU, Echo
Canceller, or
crossconnect
terminal
QCAD133
NT8D83xx
I/O
Panel
Patch
Panel
Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
CSU, Echo
Canceller, or
crossconnect
terminal
QCAD129
NT9J93xx
QPC720
J6
I/O
Panel
Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
CSU, Echo
Canceller, or
crossconnect
terminal
RS-232
RS-232
I/OPanel
QPC720
Echo
Canceller
J6
Echo
Canceller
Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
Echo Canceller
or crossconnect
terminal from
non-shielded
system
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Cable
From
Des.
Con.
To
Des.
Con.
Notes
QCAD133
NT8D83xx
QPC720
J4
Patch Panel
Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
Echo Canceller
or crossconnect
terminal from
non-shielded
system
RS-232
QPC720
J6
Echo
Canceller
Run via cabinet
I/O panel to
Echo Canceller
or crossconnect
terminal from
non-shielded
system
Switch settings
for Large Systems" (page 121) shows the NT8D72AA, NT8D72AB, and
NT8D72BA PRI DIP switch settings for Large Systems. Figure 54 "QPC720
QPC720 PRI switch settings for Large Systems.
equalization switch settings for the NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI cards for
Large Systems.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Switch settings 121
Figure 53
NT8D72AA, NT8D72AB, NT8D72BA PRI DIP switch settings for Large Systems
Note: For EuroISDN applications, use the default setting (120 ohms).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
Figure 54
QPC720 switch settings for Half and Single Group systems
Table 33
NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI transmission equalization switch settings for Large Systems
Switch S2 settings
To repeater facility
To crossconnect point
5 on
0 - 45 m
0 - 30 m
(0 - 150 ft)
(0 - 100 ft)
2, 4, 6 on
1, 3, 7 on
46 - 135 m
(151 - 450 ft)
31 - 100 m
(101 - 355 ft)
136 - 225 m
(451 - 750 ft)
101 - 200 m
(356 - 655 ft)
Switch 3 options for PRI with ESF
SW3-1 on = extended superframe format (ESF)
off = superframe format (SF)
Note 1: All positions on S2 (location B22) are OFF except as shown under the column labeled
"Switch S2 settings." The 8-pole SW3 (location E37) positions are OFF except for SW3-1 as shown
for "Switch 3 option for DTI with ESF."
Note 2: For D2, D3, or D4 framing formats (superframe formats), set all SW3 options to OFF.
Note 3: For the DTI with ESF option, you must set the framing format as ESF with the DLOP prompt
in LD17 before you set SW3-1 on the card.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI cards on Large Systems 123
Install NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI cards on Large Systems
(page 123) to install the NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI cards on Large Systems.
Procedure 11
Install the NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI on Large Systems
Step Action
1
Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the circuit card to be
installed. The following slots can be used if they are not required
for other cards.
Table 34
Shelf and slot location of NT8D72 and QPC720 for Half Group and Single Group systems
System
Shelf
Slot
Half Group,
Single Group
NT6D39 CPU/NET
3–8 Note 1
18 Note 3
NT8D35 DTI Exp Cube
2–3 Note 1
5–14 Note 1
1, 11, 12
0-3
NT8D47 RPE Cube
Core
Multi Group
5–10,
Network Module
13–14
Note 1: DTI/PRI packs require two slots. The slot indicated is the maximum slot that the pack
resides in. For example, the slot 14 pack uses slots 13 and 14.
Note 2: The DTI/PRI pack cannot be installed in slot 11. The pack would come in contact with the
BTU installed between slots 11 and 12.
Note 3: Slot 18 is only available on CPU shelf, which has no MDU/FDU.
Note 4: DTI/PRI pack could reside in slots 10 and 11, but cannot reside in slots 11 and 12 because
of powering restrictions.
2
3
4
5
Unpack and inspect the PRI cards.
Set the option switches on the PRI circuit cards.
Install the PRI circuit card in the assigned shelf and slot.
Install the network circuit card (if no network loop connection is
available).
6
If required, install I/O adapters in the I/O panel.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
7
8
Run and connect the PRI cables.
If required, install connecting blocks at MDF or wall-mounted
crossconnect terminal.
9
If required, designate connecting blocks at MDF or wall-mounted
crossconnect terminal.
10
11
12
13
If required, install CSU or Echo Canceller.
Crossconnect PRI circuits.
Add related office data into system memory. Refer to the work order.
Run PRI verification tests.
—End—
Remove NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI cards from Large Systems
cards from Large Systems.
Procedure 12
Step Action
1
2
3
Disable the D-channel in LD 96.
Disable Network Loop using LD 60. The command is DISL x.
Remove the data from memory if the circuit card is being completely
removed, not replaced.
4
5
Determine the location of the circuit cards to be removed.
Remove cross connections at MDF to wall-mounted crossconnect
terminal.
6
7
Disconnect PRI cables at Echo Canceller and at carrier interface (for
example, Office Repeater and NCTE equipment).
Tag and disconnect cables from card. Rearrange Clock Controller
card cables if required. This will affect call processing on DTI/PRI
loops.
8
9
Remove PRI and network circuit cards. If the other circuit of a dual
network card is in use, DO NOT remove the network card.
Pack and store circuit card.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install an additional network shelf 125
—End—
Install an additional network shelf
Single Group systems" (page 125) to install an additional network shelf,
when additional shelf space is required for PRI cards on Half Group and
Single Group systems. A QUD15 cooling unit is required for each additional
shelf installed.
CAUTION
Do not place the circuit packs in the shelf until Step 7 is completed.
Procedure 13
Install an additional network shelf on Half Group and Single Group systems
Step Action
1
Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the Network shelf to
be installed.
2
3
Unpack and inspect the shelf.
Remove the existing left or right rear Intelligent Peripheral Equipment
(IPE) shelf (if required).
4
5
Install the additional Network shelf in the IPE (Step 3) location.
Install a QUD15 cooling unit directly below the Network shelf and
secure with four mounting screws.
6
Install and connect the QCAD172A power cable to the added
QUD15 cooling unit as follows:
•
If the added QUD15 is located below the left Network shelf,
unplug the C11 connector from the QCAD111 power harness
that connects to the existing left side QUD15.
•
If the added QUD15 is located below the right Network shelf,
unplug the C21 connector from the QCAD111 power harness
instead of the C11.
7
Plug the C11 or C21 connector into the single-ended connector of
the QCAD172A power cable.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126 NT8D72 and QPC720 PRI card installation
8
Plug one of the two connectors at the other end of the C11 or C21
connector that was removed.
9
Plug the remaining connector of the QCAD172A power cable into
the added QUD15.
10
Adjust the QCAD111 power wiring harness, untie and then connect:
•
•
the C17 power connection cable to the right rear Network shelf
the C19 power connection cable to the left rear Network shelf
11
Install PRI trunks and enter related shelf and PRI office data into
switch memory.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
127
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation
and removal
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
Introduction
This section contains information required to install the NT5D97 Dual-port
DTI2/PRI2 (DDP2) card on Large Systems.
For installation and removal procedures for the NTBK51AA Downloadable
D-channel daughterboard, prefer to the section "NTBK51 DDCH installation
NT5D97 circuit card locations
Each NT5D97 card requires one slot on a shelf. NT5D97 cards can be
placed in any card slot in the network bus.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal
Port definitions
Since the NT5D97 card is a dual-card, it equips two ports; these ports can
be defined in the following combinations:
Table 35
NT5D97AA/AB loops configuration
Loop 0
not configured
DTI2
V
PRI2
V
not configured
DTI2
V
V
V
Loop
1
V
V
PRI2
V
V
Table 36
NT5D97AD loops configuration
Loop 0
not configured DTI2
PRI2
DDCS
not configured
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
X
V
V
X
V
Loop 1
DTI2
PRI2
DDCS
Note: Each loop DPNSS can be defined in Normal or Extended
addressing mode.
Case Scenarios for replacing a digital trunk NT8D72BA, QPC536E,
or NTCK43 by a DDP2 card
The following discussion describes possible scenarios when replacing a
digital trunk NT8D72BA PRI2 card or QPC536E DTI2 card or NTCK43 Dual
PRI card configuration with a NT5D97 DDP2 card configuration.
Case 1 - The two ports of a QPC414 network card are connected to two
digital trunks.
In this case, the QPC414 and the two digital trunks are replaced by a single
DDP2 card, which is plugged into the network shelf in the QPC414 slot.
Case 2 - One port of the QPC414 card is connected to a digital trunk, and
the second is connected to a peripheral buffer. Both cards are in a network
loop location.
In this case, the QPC414 should not be removed. The digital trunk is
removed and the DDP2 card is plugged into one of the two empty slots.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings 129
Case 3 - The network shelf is full, one port of a QPC414 network card is
connected to a digital trunk, and the second is connected to a peripheral
buffer. This arrangement is repeated for another QPC414. The digital trunks
are located in a shelf that provides only power.
In this case, the peripheral buffers will have to be reassigned, so that each
pair of buffers will use both ports of the same QPC414 card. The other
QPC414 card can then be replaced by the NT5D97 DDP2.
Note: If an NT8D72BA/NTCK43 card is being replaced by a DDP2
card, the D-channel Handler can be reconnected to the DDP2 card, or
removed if an onboard NTBK51DDCH card is used. Also, DIP Switches
in the NT5D97 must be set properly before insertion. NT5D97 has a
different DIP Switch setting from NTCK43AB. Refer to "NT5D97AA/AB
DIP switch settings" (page 129) for DIP switch setting).
NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings
The NT5D97 DDP2 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for
trunk parameters settings for port0 and port1 respectively. Additionally,
the DDP2 card is equipped with one set of four DIP switches for the Ring
Ground setting. The NT5D97AA/AB has one set of eight DIP switches and
NT5D97AD has two sets of ten DIP switches for the D-channel Handler
parameters setting.
The DIP switches are used for the setting of default values of certain
parameters. Firmware reads the general purpose switches, which sets the
default values accordingly.
Table 37
DIP switch settings for NT5D97AA/AB
Trunks
0 and 1
Card
S1
Port 0
Port 1
Trunk 0
Trunk 1
ENB/DSB
mounted on the face plate
Ring Ground
MSDL
S2
S3
Tx Mode
S4
S5
S6
S7
S8
S9
S10
S11
S12
S13
S14
S15
LBO Setting
Receiver Interface
General Purpose
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal
Figure 55
DIP switches for NT5D97AA/AB
The following parameters are set by DIP switches. The boldface font shows
the factory setup.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings 131
Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AA/AB
Impedance level and unit mode
The S9/S15 switch selects the impedance level and loop operation mode on
Table 38
Impedance level and loop mode switch settings
Switch
Description
S9/S15 Switch Setting
1
Impedance level
OFF - 120 ohm
ON - 75 ohm
2
3
4
Spare
X
X
Spare
Unit mode
OFF - Loop operates in the DTI2 mode
ON - Loop operates in the PRI2 mode
Transmission mode
A per-trunk switch (S4/S10) provides a selection of the digital trunk interface
Table 39
Impedance level and loop mode switch settings
Description
E1
S4/S10 switch settings
OFF
Not used
Line build out
A per-trunk set of three switches (S5/S11, S6/S12 and S7/S13) provides
Note: Do not change this setup.
Table 40
Trunk interface line build out switch settings
Description
0dB
Switch setting
S5/S11
S6/S12
OFF
S7/S13
OFF
OFF
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal
Receiver impedance
A per-trunk set of four DIP switches (S8/S14 provides selection between
Table 41
Trunk interface impedance switch settings
Description
75 ohm
S8/S14 switch setting
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
120 ohm
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Ring ground switches for NT5D97AA/AB
A set of four DIP switches (S2) selects which Ring lines are connected to
Table 42
Ring ground switch settings
Switch
Description
S2 switch settings
1
Trunk 0 Transit
OFF-Ring line is not grounded
ON- Ring line is grounded
2
3
4
Trunk 0 Receive
Trunk 1 Transmit
Trunk 1 Receive
OFF-Ring line is not grounded
ON- Ring line is grounded
OFF-Ring line is not grounded
ON- Ring line is grounded
OFF-Ring line is not grounded
ON- Ring line is grounded
DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughter board for
NT5D97AA/AB
In case of an onboard NTBK51AA D-channel daughterboard, a set of four
Note: Switch 8 of S3 (S3-8) does not require a switch setting to
select between the onboard NTBK51AA D-channel daughterboard
and an external DCHI/MSDL. The NT5D97 detects when the onboard
NTBK51AA D-channel daughterboard is used.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings 133
Table 43
DCH mode and address switch settings
Switch
1-4
Description
S3 switch setting
D-channel daughterboard address
For future use
See table
OFF
5-8
selections of the NTBK51AA D-channel.
Table 44
NTBK51AA daughterboard addressselect switch settings
Device
Address
Switch Setting
0
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
1
2
OFF
ON
3
ON
4
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
5
ON
6
OFF
ON
ON
7
ON
ON
8
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
9
ON
10
11
12
13
14
15
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Note 1: The system contains a maximum number of 16 DCHI, MSDL, and DDCH devices. The
Device Addresses are equivalent to the MSDL DNUM designations.
Note 2: Device address 0 is commonly assigned to the System TTYD Monitor.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
134 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal
NT5D97AD DIP switch settings
The NT5D97 DDP2 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for
trunk parameters settings for port 0 and port 1 respectively. Additionally,
the DDP2 card is equipped with one set of four DIP switches for the Ring
Ground setting. The NT5D97AA/AB has one set of eight DIP switches and
NT5D97AD has two sets of ten DIP switches for the D-channel Handler
parameters setting.
The DIP switches are used for the setting of default values of certain
parameters. Firmware reads the general purpose switches, which sets the
default values accordingly
Table 45
DIP switch settings for NT5D97AD
Trunks
0 and 1
Card
Port 0
Port 1
Trunk 0
Trunk 1
ENB/DSB mounted on the face
plate
S1
Ring Ground
DPNSS
S16
S8
S9
MSDL
S9
TX Mode
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S12
S10
S13
S14
S15
S11
S7
LBO Setting
Receiver Interface
General Purpose
Refer to DIP switch locations in Figure 56 "Dip switches locations for
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97AD DIP switch settings 135
Figure 56
Dip switches locations for NT5D97AD
The following parameters are set by DIP switches. The boldface font shows
the factory setup.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
136 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal
Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AD
Trunk 0 switches
Switch S12 gives the MPU information about its environment as shown in
Table 46
General purpose switches for NT5D97AD
Switch
Description
S9/S15 Switch Setting
S12_1
Impedance level
OFF - 120 ohm
ON - 75 ohm
S12_2
S12_3
S12_4
Spare
For future use
For future use
Spare
Unit mode
OFF - Unit operates in the DTI2 mode
ON - Unit operates in the PRI2 mode
Table 47
TX mode switches for NT5D97AD
TX mode
E1
S2
OFF
ON
Not used
Table 48
LBO switches for NT5D97AD
LBO setting
0dB
S3
S4
S5
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
7.5dB
15dB
ON
OFF
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D97AD DIP switch settings 137
Table 49
Receiver interface switches for NT5D97AD
Impedance
75 ohm
S6-1
S6-2
S6-3
S6-4
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
120 ohm
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Trunk 1 switches for NT5D97AD
Table 50
Trunk 1 switches
Switch
S7
Function
S10
S13, S14 & S15
S11
Ring ground switches for NT5D97AD
Switch S16 selects which ring lines connect to ground. When set to ON,
Table 51
Ring ground switch for NT5D97AD
Switch
S16_1
S16_2
S16_3
S16_4
Line
Trunk 0 Transmit
Trunk 0 Receive
Trunk 1 Transmit
Trunk 1 Receive
DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughter board for
NT5D97AD
Switch S9 selects the NTBK51AA DCH daughterboard address.
Switch S8 is not used when the NTBK51AA daughterboard is used.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal
Table 52
NTBK51AA DCH switches for NT5D97AD
Switch number
S9_1-4
Function
DCH daughter card address
Set to OFF
S9_5-8
S9_9
Set to ON (NTBK51AA Mode)
Set to ON (NTBK51AA Mode)
S9_10
MSDL external card
numbers assigned for future use on the MSDL external card.
Table 53
Switch settings for MSDL external card
Switch number
S9_1-10
Function
For future use
For future use
S8_1-10
the card address.
Table 54
Switch setting for MSDL external card
Switch Setting
DNUM (LD 17)
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
10
11
12
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install the NT5D97 DDP2 139
Switch Setting
DNUM (LD 17)
13
1
2
3
4
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
14
15
OFF
ON
ON
Install the NT5D97 DDP2
install the NT5D97 on Large Systems.
CAUTION
The static discharge bracelet located inside the cabinet must be
worn before handling circuit cards. Failure to wear the bracelet
can result in damage to the circuit cards.
Procedure 14
Install the NT5D97 on Large Systems
Step Action
1
Determine the cabinet and shelf location where the NT5D97 is to
be installed. The NT5D97 can be installed in any card slot in the
Network bus.
2
3
Unpack and inspect the NT5D97and cables.
If a DDCH is installed, refer to the section "NTBK51 DDCH
4
Set the option switches on the NT5D97 card before installation.
The ENB/DIS (enable/disable faceplate switch) must be OFF (DIS)
when installing the NT5D97, otherwise a system initialize can occur.
The ENB/DIS on the NT5D97 corresponds to the faceplate switch
on the QPC414 Network card.
5
6
Install NT5D97 card in the assigned shelf and slot.
Set the ENB/DIS faceplate switch to ON.
If the DDCH is installed, the DDCH LED should flash three times.
7
8
If required, install the I/O adapters in the I/O panel.
Run and connect the NT5D97 cables
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal
CAUTION
Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller
and NT5D97 card must NOT be routed through the center
of the cabinet past the power harness. Instead they should
be routed around the outside of the equipment shelves.
9
If required, install connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted
crossconnect terminal.
10
11
If required, designate connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted
crossconnect terminal.
If required, install a Network Channel Terminating Equipment
(NCTE). or Line Terminating Unit (LTU).
12
13
Add related office data into switch memory.
Enable faceplate switch S1. This is the "Loop Enable" switch.
The faceplate LEDs should go on for 4 seconds then go off and
the OOS, DIS and ACT LEDs should go on again and stay on.
IF DDCH is installed, the DCH LED should flash 3 times.
14
15
Run the PRI/DTI Verification Test.
Run the PRI status check.
—End—
Remove the NT5D97 DDP2
CAUTION
The static discharge bracelet located inside the cabinet must be
worn before handling circuit cards. Failure to wear the bracelet
can result in damage to the circuit cards.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configure the NT5D97 DDP2 141
Procedure 15
Remove the NT5D97 from Large Systems
Step Action
1
2
Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the NT5D97 card to
be removed.
Disable the Network Loop using LD 60. The command is DISL
"loop number."
The associated DCHI might have to be disabled first. The faceplate
switch ENB/DIS should not be disabled until both PRI2/DTI2 loops
are disabled first.
3
4
Remove data from memory, if the NT5D97 card is being completely
removed, not replaced.
Remove cross connections at the MDF to wall-mounted crossconnect
terminal.
5
6
Tag and disconnect cables from the card.
Rearrange Clock Controller cables if required.
CAUTION
Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller
and DDP2 card must NOT be routed through the center of
the cabinet past the power harness. Instead, they should
be routed around the outside of the equipment shelves.
7
8
Remove the DDP2 card only if both loops are disabled. If the other
circuit of a DDP2 card is in use, DO NOT remove the card. The
Faceplate switch ENB/DIS must be in the OFF (DIS) position before
the card is removed, otherwise the system will initialize.
Pack and store the NT5D97 card and circuit card.
—End—
Configure the NT5D97 DDP2
After the NT5D97 DDP2 is installed, configure the system using the same
procedures as the standard NT8D72BA PRI2.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2/PRI2 installation and removal
Consider the following when configuring the NT5D97 DDP2 card:
•
The system software allows four ports to be defined for the NT6D80
MSDL. The DDCH (NTBK51AA) card has only two ports, 0 and 1;
therefore, ports 2 and 3 must not be defined when using the NTBK51AA.
•
Port 0 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined to work with Loop 0 of the
NT5D97 DDP2 card, and Port 1 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined
to work with Loop 1 of the NT5D97. This relationship must be reflected
when configuring a new DCH in LD 17 (in response to the DCHL prompt,
enter either 0 or 1 when specifying the loop number used by the DCH).
•
•
You cannot define one of the DDP2 loops for the NTBK51AA DDCH,
and the other loop for the NT6D11AF, NT5K75AA, and NT5K35AA DCH
card or the NT6D80 MSDL.
When configuring the NT5D97 DDP2 in DTI2 outgoing dial pulse mode,
a Digit Outpulsing patch is required.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
143
NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI card
installation
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
Introduction
This section contains information required to install the NT5D12 1.5 Mb
DTI/PRI Dual-port (DDP) card on Large Systems.
For installation and removal procedures for the NTBK51AA Downloadable
D-channel daughterboard, refer to the section "NTBK51 DDCH installation
NT5D12 circuit card locations
Each NT5D12 circuit card requires one slot on a shelf. NT5D12 cards can
be placed in any card slot in the network bus, subject to the cautionary
note below.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144 NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI card installation
Port definitions
Since the NT5D12 card is dual-card, it equips two ports. These ports are
defined in the following combinations:
Port 0
Port 1
DTI
DTI
DTI
PRI
PRI
DTI
PRI
PRI
DTI
Not configured
Not configured
PRI
PRI
Not configured
Not configured
DTI
Scenarios for replacement of a digital trunk card (QPC720/QPC472)
by a DDP card
The following discussion describes possible scenarios when replacing a
digital trunk QPC720 PRI card or QPC472 DTI card configuration with a
NT5D12 DDP card configuration.
Case 1 - The two ports of a QPC414 network card are connected to two
digital trunks.
In this case, the QPC414 and the two digital trunks are replaced by a single
DDP card, which is plugged into the CE shelf in the QPC414 slot.
Case 2 - One port of the QPC414 card is connected to a digital trunk,
and the second is connected to a peripheral buffer. Both cards are in the
network loop location.
In this case, the QPC414 should not be removed. The digital trunk is
removed and the DDP card is plugged into one of the two empty slots.
Case 3 - The CE shelf is full, one port of a QPC414 network card is
connected to a digital trunk, and the second is connected to a peripheral
buffer. This arrangement is repeated for another QPC414. The digital trunks
are located in a shelf that provides only power.
In this case, the peripheral buffers will have to be reassigned, so that each
pair of buffers will use both ports of the same QPC414 card. The other
QPC414 card can then be replaced by the NT5D12 DDP.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D12 switch settings 145
Note in all cases - If a QPC720 card is being replaced by a DDP card, the
D-channel Handler or MSDL can be either reconnected to the DDP card, or
removed if an onboard NTBK51AA DDCH card is used.
NT5D12 switch settings
The NT5D12 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for trunk
parameters settings for port0 and port1 respectively. Additionally, the
NT5D12 card is equipped with one set of four DIP switches for the Ring
Ground setting and one set of eight DIP switches for the D-channel Handler
parameters setting.
The DIP switches are used for setting of default values of certain
parameters. The general purpose switches are read by the firmware which
sets the default values accordingly.
The following parameters are being set by the DIP switches. Factory setups
are shown in bold.
General Purpose Switches
A per-trunk set of four DIP switches provides the default setting for
operational modes. Switch set S9 is used for Trunk 0. Switch set S15 is used
Table 55
General purpose switch settings
Description
Switch
S9/S15 Switch Setting
OFF - ESF
1
Framing Mode
ON - SF
2
3
4
Yellow Alarm Method
OFF - FDL
ON - Digit2
OFF - B8ZS
ON - AMI
OFF
Zero Code Suppression
Mode
Unused
Trunk interface switches
Transmission Mode
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146 NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI card installation
Table 56
Trunk interface transmission mode switch settings
Description
For future use.
T1
S4/S10 Switch Setting
OFF
ON
Line Build Out
A per-trunk set of three switches provides a selection between 0, 7.5 or 15
Table 57
Trunk interface line build out switch settings
Description
Switch Setting
S5/S11
OFF
ON
S6/S12
OFF
ON
S7/S13
OFF
OFF
ON
0 dB
7.5 dB
15 dB
ON
OFF
Receiver Impedance
A per trunk set of four DIP switches provides a selection between 75, 100
Table 58
Trunk interface receiver impedance switch settings
Description
S8/S14 Switch Setting
75
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
100
120
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
Ring ground switches
A set of four DIP switches selects which Ring lines are connected to the
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D12 switch settings 147
Table 59
Ring ground switch settings
Description
Switch
S2 Switch Setting
1
Trunk 0 Transmit
OFF - Ring line is not grounded
ON - Ring line is grounded
2
3
4
Trunk 0 Receive
Trunk 1 Transmit
Trunk 1 Receive
OFF - Ring line is not grounded
ON - Ring line is grounded
OFF - Ring line is not grounded
ON - Ring line is grounded
OFF - Ring line is not grounded
ON - Ring line is grounded
DCH mode and address select switches
A set of eight DIP switches selects between an onboard NTBK51AA
D-channel daughterboard and an external MSDL/DCHI card. In the case
of an onboard NTBK51AA D-channel daughterboard, four of the switches
Table 60
DCH mode and address select switch settings
Description
Switch
S3 Switch Setting
1-4
D-channel daughterb
oard
Address
5-7
8
For future use.
OFF
External DCH or
Onboard DDCH
OFF - MSDL or DCHI card
ON - Onboard DDCH daughterboard
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148 NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI card installation
Table 61
NTBK51AA daughterboard address select switch settings
Device
Address1
Switch Setting
02
1
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
2
OFF
ON
3
ON
4
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
5
ON
6
OFF
ON
ON
7
ON
ON
8
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
9
ON
10
11
12
13
14
15
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Note 1: The maximum number of DCHI, MSDL, and DDCH devices in the system is 16.
Note 1: The Device Addresses are equivalent to the MSDL DNUM designations.
Note 2: Device address 0 is commonly assigned to the System Monitor.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT5D12 switch settings 149
Figure 57
Switch functional areas on the NT5D12
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150 NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI card installation
Figure 58
NT5D12 switch default settings
Install the NT5D12 DDP
install the NT5D12 on Large Systems.
CAUTION
The static discharge bracelet located inside the cabinet must be
worn before handling circuit cards. Failure to wear the bracelet
can result in damage to the circuit cards.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install the NT5D12 DDP 151
Procedure 16
Install the NT5D12 on Large Systems
Step Action
1
Determine the cabinet and shelf location where the NT5D12 card is
to be installed. The NT5D12 can be installed in any card slot in the
Network bus, subject to the cautionary note below.
CAUTION
Some installed-based systems can have a Bus
Terminating Unit (BTU) already installed. This can
interfere with a selected NT5D12 card location. In such
cases, the NT5D12 should be installed in an alternate
network bus card slot location.
2
3
Unpack and inspect circuit cards and cables.
If a DDCH is to be installed, refer to "NTBK51 DDCH installation
4
Set the option switches on the NT5D12 circuit card before
S1 (faceplate switch) must be OFF (DIS) when installing the
NT5D12. S1 on the NT5D12 corresponds to the faceplate switch
on the QPC414 Network card.
5
6
7
8
Install the NT5D12 circuit card in the assigned shelf and slot.
Add related office administration data into the system memory.
If required, install the I/O adapters in the I/O panel.
Run and connect the NT5D12 cables.
CAUTION
Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller
and NT5D12 card must NOT be routed through the center
of the cabinet past the power harness. Instead, route
them around the outside of the equipment shelves.
9
If required, install connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted
crossconnect terminal.
10
If required, designate connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted
crossconnect terminal.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152 NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI card installation
11
12
If required, install Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE).
Enable faceplate switch S1. This is the "Loop Enable" switch.
The faceplate LEDs should go on for 4 seconds then go off and the
OOS, DIS and ACT LEDs should go on again and stay on.
IF DDCH is installed, the DCH LED should flash 3 times.
Run PRI/DTI Verification Test.
13
14
Run PRI status check.
—End—
Remove the NT5D12 DDP
NT5D12 from Large Systems.
CAUTION
A static discharge bracelet must be worn before handling circuit
cards. Failure to wear the bracelet can result in damage to the
circuit cards.
Procedure 17
Remove the NT5D12 DDP
Step Action
1
2
Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the NT5D12 card to
be removed.
Disable Network Loop using LD 60. The command is DISL "loop
number."
The associated DCHI might have to be disabled first. The faceplate
switch S1 should not be disabled until both PRI loops are disabled
first.
3
4
Remove data from memory, if the NT5D12 card is being completely
removed, not replaced.
Remove cross connections at the MDF to wall-mounted crossconnect
terminal.
5
6
Tag and disconnect cables from card.
Rearrange Clock Controller cables if required.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configure the NT5D12 DDP 153
CAUTION
Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller
and NT5D12 card must NOT be routed through the center
of the cabinet past the power harness. Instead they should
be routed around the outside of the equipment shelves.
7
8
Determine if the other circuit of a NT5D12 card is in use.DO NOT
remove the card if in use.
Remove the NT5D12 card only if both loops are disabled. Switch
S1 (faceplate switch) must be in the OFF (DIS) position before the
card is removed.
9
Pack and store the NT5D12 card and circuit card.
—End—
Configure the NT5D12 DDP
After the NT5D12 DDP has been installed, it can be configured using the
same procedures as for the standard QPC720 PRI card.
Consider the following when configuring the NT5D12 DDP card:
•
The system software allows four ports to be defined for the NT6D80
MSDL. The DDCH (NTBK51AA) card has only two ports, 0 and 1;
therefore, ports 2 and 3 must not be defined when using the NTBK51AA.
•
Port 0 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined to work with Loop 0 of the
NT5D12 DDP card, and Port 1 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined
to work with Loop 1 of the NT5D12. This relationship must be reflected
when configuring a new DCH in LD 17 (in response to the DCHL prompt,
enter either 0 or 1 when specifying the loop number used by the DCH).
•
You cannot define one of the NT5D12 loops for the NTBK51AA DDCH,
and the other loop for the QPC757 DCHI or the NT6D80 MSDL.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154 NT5D12 Dual-port DTI/PRI card installation
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
155
Clock Controller description and
installation
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156 Clock Controller description and installation
Introduction
This chapter introduces the NTRB53 Clock Controller, and provides
procedures on how to install this clock controller on Large Systems.
The NTRB53 Clock Controller replaces the QPC471H and QPC775F in
new systems. QPC471H and QPC775F Clock Controllers continue to be
supported.
Note: The NTRB53 Clock Controller cannot be combined with a
QPC775 or a QPC471 card in one system
The illustrations used in the description section depict a Small System.
However, the system can also be representative of a Large System.
Description
This section provides an overview on the use of clock controllers. For Large
Systems, the following clock controllers are supported:
•
•
•
NTRB53
QPC471
QPC775
Note: Clock controllers cannot be mixed in one system.
The NTRB53 Clock Controller is available for all markets. The QPC471
Clock Controller is available for U.S. markets. Vintages A through G of the
QPC471 Clock Controller can be used in one system; vintage H of QPC471
Clock Controllers cannot be mixed with clock controllers of other vintages.
The QPC775E Clock Controller card is available for only Canadian and
International markets.
Need for synchronization
Digital trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock
source will result in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all
parts of the network.
When digital signals are being transported over a communication link,
the receiving end must operate at the same frequency (data rate) as
the originating end to prevent loss of information. This is referred to
as link synchronization. If both ends of a communication link are not
in synchronization, data bit slips occur and therefore a loss of data
results. In general, accurate timing is very important, but more importantly
synchronized timing is a must for reliable data transfer.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description 157
When only two switches are interconnected, synchronization can be
achieved by operating the two systems in a master/slave mode whereby one
system derives its timing from the other. However, in a network of digital
systems, slips can be better prevented by forcing all digital systems to use
a common reference clock (see Figure 59 "Hierarchical Synchronization"
Supported Clock Controllers
For Large Systems, the following clock controllers are supported:
•
•
•
NTRB53
QPC471
QPC775
NTRB53 Clock Controller
The NTRB53 Clock Controller is a replacement for the QPC471 and
QPC775 Clock Controllers. The NTRB53 clock controller retains existing
functionality.
Software configuration of the clock remains unchanged. A PSDL object
allows field upgrades of the clock’s firmware. Overlay changes allow for
force download and status checking. Support for the IDC command and
hardware inventory are also included.
System Initialization During system initialization, the system software will
verify if the clock controllers equipped in the system are the downloadable
clock controllers (NTRB53) or not. If the clock controllers are identified as
the downloadable clock controller cards, then both downloadable clock
controller cards will be checked for the software version number they are
running with. This is compared with the version number of the PSDL file
stored in the system software database.
If there is a mismatch between the two version numbers and the system
database has the higher version number, the card will be put in the PSDL
downloading tree. Once the entry is added in the PSDL tree, the preprocess
step is done. The next step is for the system to initiate the downloading in
the background, using the PSDL tree. As soon as the download complete
message is received from the card, the CPU sends a message to reset the
clock controller card so that it boots with the new software. Once a self-test
is complete the core sends an enable base message to enable the card.
Maintenance Overlays Downloading can be initiated from LD 60 for the
inactive clock controller card as part of the enabling sequence of the card. A
download can be forced by specifying the optional parameter FDL (Force
Download) when enabling the card. At the prompt, enter:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158 Clock Controller description and installation
ENL CC x FDL
Enable Clock in side x with the force download option
If the optional parameter is not specified, then downloading is conditional.
This means that the version number of the loadware on the clock controller
card will be checked against the version number stored on the system disk.
If a mismatch is found and the version number in the system software
database is higher, then downloading will be initiated for that card. The entry
for the card is not added to the PSDL tree at this time. Instead, downloading
is initiated on a single card and only that card will be allowed to perform
the force download option.
QPC471 and QPC775 Clock Controllers
Clock Controllers QPC471 and QPC775 will continue to function with:
•
•
•
CS 1000M HG systems
CS 1000M SG systems
CS 1000M MG systems
information.
Synchronization methods
There are two common methods of operation for maintaining timing
coordination between switching systems, Plesiosynchronous and
Mesosynchronous.
Plesiosynchronous operation
In a Plesiosynchronous operation, nodal clocks run independently (free run)
at the same nominal frequency. There are frequency differences between
of frame slips are directly proportional to the frequency difference. Slips are
inevitable but can be minimized by using very stable clocks and elastic
stores or buffers. These buffers are capable of absorbing a certain number
of data bits to compensate for slight variances in clock frequencies.
Mesosynchronous operation
In a Mesosynchronous operation, nodal clocks are continuously and
automatically locked to an external reference clock. With this method, frame
slips can be eliminated if elastic stores are large enough to compensate for
transmission variances. Mesosynchronous operation is virtually slip free.
Whenever possible the system uses the Mesosynchronous mode of
operation by using the clock controller circuit cards to lock onto an external
reference source (such as the Central Office, another PBX, and so on).
This statement is true unless the system is used as a Master in an
independent/private network (no digital links to a higher Node Category).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description 159
In an isolated private network, the clock controller can operate in free run
mode and act as a master clock to be tracked by other PBX systems in
the private network.
Hierarchical synchronization
Figure 59 "Hierarchical Synchronization" (page 159) provides a general
view of the Digital Network Clock Synchronization including the four stratum
level Node Categories. Stratum 1 being the most accurate and Stratum 4
being the least accurate. System clocking meets Node Category E Stratum
4 requirements. Also shown are ways of providing a Secondary Clock
Source while preventing timing loops.
Figure 59
Hierarchical Synchronization
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160 Clock Controller description and installation
Stratum levels
In a digital network, nodes are synchronized using a priority master/slave
method. Digital nodes are ranked in Stratum levels 1 to 5. Each node is
synchronized to the highest ranking node in its neighborhood with which it
Table 62
Node categories and stratum levels
Stratum 2
Stratum 3
Stratum 4
Accuracy
Holdover
+/- 1.6 * 10-8 Hz
1 * 10-10 per day
+/- 4.6 * 10-6 Hz
+/- 3.2 * 10-5 Hz
Not Required
<= 255 frame slips in
1st 24 hours
Hardware Duplication Required
Required (Note 1)
Not Required
MTIE During
MTIE <= 1 usec Phase MTIE <= 1 usec Phase No Requirement (Note
Rearrangement
Change Slope: <= 81
ns in any 1.326 msec
Change Slope: <= 81
ns in any 1.326 msec
2)
Pull-in Range
+/- 1.6 * 10-8 Hz
Required
+/- 4.6 * 10-6 Hz
Required
+/- 3.2 * 10-5 Hz
Not required
Dedicated Timing
Required
Note 1: Non-duplicated clock hardware that meets all other stratum 3
requirements is referred to as stratum 3ND.
Note 2: Stratum 4 clock hardware that meets MTIE requirements during
rearrangements is referred to as 4E.
Frame slip
Digital signals must have accurate clock synchronization for data to
be interleaved into or extracted from the appropriate timeslot during
multiplexing and demultiplexing operations. A Frame Slip is defined (for 2
Mbyte links) as the repetition of, or deletion of the 256 data bits of a CEPT
frame due to a sufficiently large discrepancy in the read and write rates at
the buffer (clocks are not operating at exactly the same speed).
When data bits are written into (added to) a buffer at a slightly higher rate
than that at which they are being read (emptied), sooner or later the buffer
overflows This is a slip-frame deletion.
In the opposite situation, when data bits are written (added) into a buffer
at slightly lower rate than that at which they are being read (emptied),
eventually the buffer runs dry or underflows. This is also a slip-frame
repetition.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description 161
A 1.5 Mbyte PRI contains a buffer large enough to hold about 2 full DS-1
frames (193 x 2 = 386). A 2 Mbyte PRI contains a buffer large enough to
contain 2 full frames (256 x 2 = 512 bits). The buffer is normally kept half
full (1 frame).
degradations shown in the table can be controlled or avoided with proper
clock synchronization.
Table 63
Performance impact of one slip on service type
Potential Impact
Service
Encrypted Text
Video
Encryption key must be resent.
Freeze frame for several seconds. Loud pop
on audio.
Digital Data
Deletion or repetition of data. Possible
misframe.
Facsimile
Deletion of 4 to 8 scan lines. Dropped call.
Voice Band Data
Transmission Errors for 0.01 to 2 s. Dropped
call.
Voice
Possible click.
Guidelines
Some key points to keep in mind when designing Network Synchronization:
•
•
•
•
Where possible, the Master Clock Source should always be from a Node
Category/Stratum with higher clock accuracy, that is, a PBX connected to
the Central Office (CO.) The CO is the Master and the PBX is the Slave.
The source should not be in free-run itself (providing its own clock)
unless it is operating in a fully independent network where the source
When connecting two PBXs together (no CO connections), the most
reliable PBX should be the Master. Reliability here refers to Dual
CPU/Dual Clock, battery back-up or stratum level of the clock controller.
Avoid timing loops. A timing loop occurs when a clock using as its
reference frequency a signal that it itself traceable to the output of that
clock. The formation of such a closed timing loop leads to frequency
instability and is not permitted. Timing loops are sometimes unavoidable
on the secondary clock reference source.
•
Ensure all CO/PBX links used as clock references have a traceable path
back to the same stratum 1 clock source.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162 Clock Controller description and installation
While it is beyond the scope of this discussion to provide detailed Network
Synchronization, the following examples illustrate some of the basic
concepts to achieve stable clocking.
Figure 60
Example 1, Isolated Private Network
In this example, there is no digital connection to the Central Office.
Figure 61
Example 2, Isolated Private Network with Secondary Reference Clock
In this example, there is no digital connection to the Central Office. For tie
lines between PBXs facilitated by a central office, clocking is derived from
the PBX, not the CO. When a second Digital loop is available, it can be used
as a Secondary Clock source in case the Primary Source fails.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description 163
Figure 62
Example 3, Clocking Hierarchy referenced to a Public Network Master Clock
This is an example of a "STAR" arrangement— one Hub PBX is linked to
the Central Office and all other PBXs are connected as slaves. When a
second Digital loop from the system which forms the hub of this network
becomes available, it can be used as a Secondary Clock Source in case the
Primary Source fails.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164 Clock Controller description and installation
Figure 63
Example 4, Alternate Clocking from the same CO
In this case, a digital connection to the Central Office can exist (i.e. Loops X
and Y). When a second Digital loop from the CO or Master M-1 becomes
available, it can be used as a Secondary Clock Source in case the Primary
Source fails.
To avoid timing loops, in example 4-4 the most reliable slave system should
not have a Secondary Clock Source (SREF= <cr>). In this example, this is
illustrated by the node which supports loops X and Z.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description 165
Figure 64
Example 5, digital connection to the CO
In this example, digital connections to the Central Office do exist. When a
second Digital loop from the CO becomes available, it can be used as a
Secondary Clock Source in case the Primary Source fails.
Slaves can track on each other as a secondary source since the chances of
both links to the Central Offices going down at the same time are minimal.
All Central Offices must have a path back to the same stratum 1 source.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166 Clock Controller description and installation
Figure 65
Example 6, Complex Isolated Private Network
Digital connections to the Central Office do not exist in this example. If it
does, the PBX connected to it will track off the CO and will in turn be used
as a clock source to other nodes.
When a second Digital loop from the Master system becomes available, it
can be used as a Secondary Clock Source in case the Primary Source fails.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description 167
Figure 66
Example 7, Network Clocking with MUX
In this example, the direct connection to the CO (without a MUX) should be
used as a primary clock reference because this is where the least amount of
hardware is involved. The MUX must pass the clock and not generate its
own clock; in other words, it must be a slave (not Free Run). Synchronized
clocking is required.
Modes of operation
There are two modes of operation, tracking mode and free run (non-tracking)
mode.
Tracking mode
In tracking mode, the Primary Rate Interface (PRI) or Digital Trunk Interface
(DTI) loop supplies an external clock reference to the onboard clock
controller. Two PRI or DTI packs can operate in tracking mode, with one
defined as the primary reference source for clock synchronization, the other
defined as a secondary reference source. The secondary reference acts as
a back-up to the primary reference.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168 Clock Controller description and installation
Free run (non-tracking) mode
The clock synchronization for a PRI loop can operate in free-run mode if:
•
•
•
the loop is not defined as the primary or secondary clock reference
the primary and secondary references are disabled
the primary and secondary references are in a local alarm state
Small System Clock Controller daughterboard
The Small System supports a single onboard clock controller daughterboard,
the NTAK20, located on either:
•
•
•
•
•
the NTRB21 1.5 Mbyte DTI/PRI card
the NTAK09 1.5 DTI/PRI card
the NTAK10 2 Mbyte DTI card
the NTAK79 2 Mbyte PRI card
the NTBK50 2 Mbyte PRI card
The clock controller circuitry synchronizes to an external reference clock and
generates and distributes the clock to the system. This enables the system
to function either as a slave to an external clock or as a clocking master.
Note: When configuring ISL over analog trunks, clock controllers are
not required.
Installation procedures
This section provides procedures on how to install a clock controller on
Large Systems.
CAUTION
Do not deviate from the procedures described in this section. Call
processing can stop if procedural steps are not followed properly.
Determine slots and shelves
the shelves and available slots.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation procedures 169
Table 64
Clock Controller shelves and slots
System
Shelf
Slot(s)
9
Half Group,
NT6D39 CPU/NET
Single Group
13
Multi Group
NTDA35 Network Module
Set switches
switch settings for QPC775" (page 170) shows the settings for the QPC775.
settings for the NTRB53.
Table 65
Clock Controller switch settings for QPC471 vintage H
SW1
SW2
SW4
System
Half Group, Single Group
Option 81
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
on on on on
off off off off off off off off off
on
on
on
off off off off off
*
*
*
*
*
*
on
Multi Group (with the exception of
Option 81)
off off off off off off off **
on
on
Multi Group with Fiber Network
off off off off off off off **
*
*
*
If there is only one clock controller card in the system, set to OFF. If there are two clock
controller cards, determine the total cable length between the J3 connectors (no single cable
can exceed 25 ft.) and set these two switch positions for this cable length, as shown above. The
maximum total (combined) length is 50 ft. Set the switches on both cards to the same settings.
** Set to ON for clock controller 0. Set to OFF for clock controller 1.
Note: FNF based-systems the total clock path length is equal to the length of the NTRC49 cable
used to connect between the two clock controller cards.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170 Clock Controller description and installation
SW1
SW2
SW4
System
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
*Cable length between the
J3 faceplate connectors:
0–4.3 m (0–14 ft)
off off
on
off
4.6–6.1 m (15–20 ft)
6.4–10.1 m (21–33 ft)
10.4–15.2 m (34–50 ft)
off
on
on on
*
If there is only one clock controller card in the system, set to OFF. If there are two clock
controller cards, determine the total cable length between the J3 connectors (no single cable
can exceed 25 ft.) and set these two switch positions for this cable length, as shown above. The
maximum total (combined) length is 50 ft. Set the switches on both cards to the same settings.
** Set to ON for clock controller 0. Set to OFF for clock controller 1.
Note: FNF based-systems the total clock path length is equal to the length of the NTRC49 cable
used to connect between the two clock controller cards.
Table 66
Clock Controller switch settings for QPC775
System
SW2
ON
SW3
OFF
OFF
SW4
ON
Half Group, Single Group
Multi Group
OFF
ON
Table 67
Clock Controller switch settings for NTRB53
Multigroup/
Machine
Faceplate
Side Number
Machine
Type #2
Single group
Type # 1
Cable Length
(CC to CC)
5
1
2
3
4
6
Multigroup
Off
Off
0-14 ft
Side 0 = On
81 = Off
61, 51C, 61C
= Off
Side 1 = Off
51, 51C
71, 81, 81C
= On
Single group =
On
61, 61C, 81C =
On
Off
On
On
On
Off
On
15-20 ft
21-33 ft
34-50 ft
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation procedures 171
Note: Switches 7 and 8 are not used.
Start the Clock Controller
The clock controller, when first enabled, is in free run mode. It stays in this
mode for several minutes before being switched to tracking mode. Manual
mode setting is possible using LD 60.
All clock controllers begin tracking within approximately 15 minutes.
Clock Controller commands
During the installation procedure you will use some of the clock controller
commands available in LD 39 and LD 60. Refer to Software Input Output
Reference — Maintenance (NN43001-711).
LD 39 commands with the NTRB53 Clock Controller
Description
Command
DIS SCG x
Disable SCG card x (0 or 1).
Not applicable for NTRB53 Clock Controller. Use LD 60 instead.
ENL SCG x
SCLK
Enable SCG x (0 or 1).
Not applicable for NTRB53 Clock Controller. Use LD 60 instead.
Switch clock to other SCG.
Functions with NTRB53 Clock Controller
STAT SCG x
Print status of SCG x (0 or 1).
Prints normal status of NTRB53 (not full status)
Install or replace a Clock Controller on a Half Group and Single Group
system
Systems." (page 171) outlines the steps to install a clock controller on Half
Group and Single Group systems.
Procedure 18
Install a clock controller for Half Group and Single Group Systems.
Step Action
1
2
Unpack and inspect the circuit card.
3
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172 Clock Controller description and installation
4
5
Set the ENL/DIS toggle switch to DIS (disable).
Replacing a clock controller, do the following:
•
Perform a status check on the clock with the SSCK command in
LD 60. The new controller should have the same status.
Note: ERR20 messages can be generated. These can usually
be ignored. However, excessive clock switching should be
avoided, especially when counters are near the maintenance
or out-of-service thresholds. Excessive switching could
generate threshold-exceeded messages or cause the PRI to
be automatically disabled. Check the counters in LD 60. If
necessary, reset the counters using the RCNT command.
a. Set the old card’s faceplate ENL/DIS switch to DIS.
b. Disconnect the cables from the old clock controller card and
remove the card from the shelf.
6
7
8
9
Adjust the 3PE switches to recognize the clock controller card.
Set faceplate ENL/DIS switch to DIS.
Install the clock controller in the selected slot.
Run and connect cables
a. Connect the primary reference to J2.
b. If available, connect the secondary reference to J1.
c. Connect the cable between the two clocks to J3 on each
controller card.
10
Set the faceplate ENL/DIS switch to ENL.
Note: Verify that the faceplate LED flashes three times to ensure
the clock controller self test passed.
11
12
Enable the clock controller by entering ENL CC x in LD 60.
Set the error detection thresholds and clock synchronization controls
in LD 73. (Optional with card replacement; required with new
installation.)
13
Track on a primary or secondary reference clock, use LD 60. Use
the following command:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation procedures 173
TRCK
PCK
(for primary)
(for secondary)
(for free-run)
SCLK
FRUN
14
Issue the status check command, SSCK.
Note: In order for the clock enhancement feature in the clock
controller (NTRB53) to be fully functional, the user must issue a
manual INI to activate the clock enhancement feature.
—End—
Install or replace a Clock Controller on a Single Group and Multi Group
System
System" (page 173) outlines the steps to install a clock controller on Single
Group and Multi Group systems.
Procedure 19
Install a Clock Controller on a Single Group and Multi Group System
Step Action
1
2
Unpack and inspect the circuit card.
3
4
5
Set the ENL/DIS toggle switch to DIS (disable).
If replacing a clock controller, do the following:
•
Perform a status check on the clock with the SSCK command in
LD 60. The new controller should have the same status.
•
•
Use LD 135 to STAT the CPU and switch if necessary
Disable the old card using LD 60.
Note 1: Do not disable an active clock or a clock associated
with an active CPU.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174 Clock Controller description and installation
Note 2: ERR20 messages can be generated. These can
usually be ignored. However, excessive clock switching should
be avoided, especially when counters are near the maintenance
or out-of-service thresholds. Excessive switching could
generate threshold-exceeded messages or cause the PRI to
be automatically disabled. Check the counters in LD 60. If
necessary, reset the counters using the RCNT command.
a. Set the old card’s faceplate ENL/DIS switch to DIS.
b. Disconnect the cables from the old clock controller card and
remove it from the shelf.
6
7
Install the new clock controller in the selected slot.
Run and connect the cables
a. Connect the primary reference to J2.
b. Connect the secondary reference to J, if available.
c. Connect the cable from J3 on each controller card to the junctor
group connector.
8
9
Set the faceplate ENL/DIS switch to ENL.
Execute the ENL CC X command in LD 60. The faceplate LED
should go to the OFF state.
10
11
Set the error detection thresholds and clock synchronization controls
in LD 73. (Optional if replacing card; required with new installation.)
Track on a primary or secondary reference clock, use LD 60. The
command follows:
TRCK
PCK
(for primary)
(for secondary)
(for free-run)
SCLK
FRUN
12
13
Issue the status check command, SSCK.
(Optional) Wait two minutes before activating the newly installed
clock controller with the LD 60 SWCK command.
Note: This allows a smooth transition of the clock controller
upgrade.
14
Repeat for the second clock controller, if necessary.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation procedures 175
Upgrade to an NTRB53 Clock Controller on a Single Group and Multi
Group System
Follow these procedures to replace the existing clock controller with the
NTRB53 Clock Controller on Large Systems.
Note: The NTRB53 Clock Controller cannot be combined with a
QPC775 or a QPC471 card in one system.
Procedure 20
Remove old equipment
Step Action
1
Ensure the clock controller card being removed for dual core
systems is on the inactive core. If you need to switch cores go to
LD 135 and enter:
LD 135
SCPU
****
Switch cores
Exit the overlay
2
Disable the QPC775 or QPC471 Clock Controller card. At the
prompt, enter:
LD 60
Load the program
SSCK x
Get status of system clock where x = 0 or 1
Switch clocks if the clock is active at the prompt, enter:
SWCK
Switch system clock from active to standby
Get status of system clock where x = 0 or 1
SSCK x
Ensure the other clock controller is active and in the free run mode. At
the prompt, enter:
SSCK x
Get status of system clock where x = 0 or 1
Set clock controller tracking to free run
TRCK
FRUN
3
Disable the clock controller card you are removing. At the prompt,
enter:
DIS CC x
Disable system clock controller where x = 0 or 1
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176 Clock Controller description and installation
4
5
6
Set the ENL/DIS switch to DIS on the card you are removing.
Tag and disconnect the cables to the card you are removing.
Unhook the locking devices on the card and pull it out of the card
cage.
—End—
Follow these procedures to install new equipment with Clock Controller on
Large Systems.
Procedure 21
Installing new equipment
Step Action
1
2
Set the ENB/DIS switch to DIS on the replacement card.
Set the option switches on the replacement card (NTRB53). Refer to
3
4
Insert the replacement card into the vacated slot and hook the
locking devices.
Connect the reference cables (J1 and J2) to the replacement card.
CAUTION
Clock-to-Clock cable J3 should never be connected
between the old clock (QPC471 or QPC775) and the new
clock (NTRB53).
5
6
Set the ENB/DIS switch to ENB on the replacement card.
Software enable the card. At the prompt, enter
LD 60
ENL CC x
Enable clock controller card, where x = 0 or 1
7
8
Verify that the card is active. At the prompt, enter:
SSCK x
****
Get status of system clock where x = 0 or 1
Exit the overlay
Switch to the core with the new clock. At the prompt, enter:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation procedures 177
LD 135
SCPU
Switch CPU
Note: Wait two minutes before proceeding to the next step.
CAUTION
The following procedure to faceplate disable the active
clock controller could impact service.
9
Disable the faceplate of the active clock controller to force the newly
installed clock controller to activate.
10
Disconnect the Clock-to-Clock faceplate cable to J3 of the new clock
controller card in the active CPU side
CAUTION
Active calls will experience noise over local and trunk calls
11
Verify that the clock controller is active. At the prompt, enter
LD 60
SSCK
Get status of the new system clock, where x = 0 or 1
Track primary clock, where x = 0 or 1
Resets all alarm counters of all digital cards
Exit the overlay
TRCK PCK
RCNT
****
Note: Replacing the clock controller will generate errors on the
network equipment. It is recommended that all counters be reset.
12
13
Replace the remaining QPC775 or QPC471 clock controller card,
tag and disconnect the cables to the card you are removing.
Unhook the locking devices on the card and pull it out of the card
cage.
14
15
Set the ENB/DIS switch to DIS on the replacement card.
Set the option switches on the replacement card (NTRB53). Refer to
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178 Clock Controller description and installation
16
17
Insert the replacement card into the selected slot and hook the
locking devices.
Connect the reference cables (J1 and J2) and the clock-to-clock
cable (J3) to the replacement card.
18
19
Set the ENB/DIS switch to ENB on the replacement card.
Disable the software and enable the card. At the prompt, enter:
LD 60
DID CC x
ENL CC x
Disable clock controller card, where x=0 or 1
Enable clock controller card, where x=0 or 1
20
21
Verify that the card is active. At the prompt, enter:
SSCK x
****
Get status of system clock, where x=0 or 1
Exit the overlay
Note: Wait two minutes before proceeding to next step.
Activate the new card and verify that it is active. At the prompt enter:
LD60
SWCK
Switch system clock from active to standby
Get status of system clock, where x = 0 or 1
SSCK x
TRCK PCK
RCNT
Track primary clock, where x = 0 or 1
Reset alarm counters of all digital cards
Exit the overlay
****
22
23
Set the clock source to the status it was in before the replacement
procedure.
Verify clock switchover and tracking. At the prompt, enter:
SWCK
SSCK x
****
Switch system clock from active to standby
Get status of system clock, where x = 0 or 1
Exit the overlay
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
179
ISL installation
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
ISL configurations
The ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) is used on PRI/DTI connections. The ISL
feature operates in two modes, shared and dedicated.
Shared mode
The DCHI supports ISDN PRI signaling for both PRI and ISL trunks.
Dedicated mode
In this mode, the DCHI supports ISL trunks using ISDN PRI signaling. The
D-channel communicates with the far end using a dedicated leased line,
dialup modem, or DTI trunk.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180 ISL installation
DCHI switch settings
For ISL functions, use the following switch settings for the J2 port:
•
•
•
RS-232 for 19.2 Kbps and below
HS (RS-422) for speeds above 19.2 Kbps
External clock (in LD 17) provided by modem, ADM, or ASIM, otherwise
DCHI will be running at 64 Kbps
•
DTE device configuration
jumper settings" (page 180) shows the ISL high-speed programming jumper
settings for the NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE DCHI, and Figure 68 "NT6D11AB,
(page 181) shows the ISL low-speed programming jumper settings for the
NT6D11AB, NT6D11AE/AF DCHI.
Figure 67
NT6D11AB, NT6D11AD DCHI with ISL high-speed programming jumper settings
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MSDL switch settings 181
Figure 68
NT6D11AB, NT6D11AD DCHI with ISL low-speed programming jumper settings
MSDL switch settings
For ISL functions, use the following switch settings.
•
•
•
DTE for high speed programming;
RS-232 for 19.2 Kbps and below;
External clock (in LD17) provided by modem, ADM, or ASIM, HSDM:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182 ISL installation
Figure 69
MSDL/ISL settings
Shared mode
In shared mode, the D-channel is provided by the DCHI or MSDL card and
PRI. The hardware configuration is basically the same as the ISDN PRI
Shared mode is established through service change in LD17, prompt USR,
with the response SHA.
In the shared mode, the DCH can share signaling for no more than 382 (T1)
or 480 (E1) trunks, including digital and analog.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dedicated mode using leased line 183
Figure 70
ISL in shared mode
Dedicated mode using leased line
In this configuration, the D-channel connects the DCHI or MSDL to a
modem which communicates with a far-end modem over a dedicated leased
2400 baud D-channel can support signaling for approximately 382 (T1) or
480 (E1) trunks without non-call associated messages.
Both modems should be set in the synchronous mode.
Figure 71
ISL dedicated mode, using leased line
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184 ISL installation
Dedicated mode using dialup modem
In this configuration, the DCHI or MSDL is connected to a modem which is
connected to a 500 set line card. See Figure 73 "ISL dedicated mode, using
dialup Hayes Smartmodem 2400" (page 186). The call is connected to the
far end through the analog (500/2500 type set) -to-TIE trunk path.
To set up the D-channel, program the modem at one end in the autodial
mode, so it automatically initiates a call to the other end at power up. The
autodial DN must be coordinated with personnel at the far end switch.
Install a modem for ISL applications
The modem software and hardware must be installed sequentially. The
modem software must be defined before the hardware connection between
the modem and the system can be made. Within the software installation,
either the autodial or the auto-answer software can be set up first. Figure
corresponding modems.
Figure 72
ISL dedicated mode: using dialup Hayes Smartmodem 2400
Examples of parameters used for actual auto-answer and autodial sites are
shown in the following tables (note that the Hayes Smartmodem has been
modem" (page 185) shows the active and stored profiles of the autodial site
answer or terminating modem" (page 185) shows the active and stored
profiles of the auto-answer site (or the terminating modem). The Hayes
Smartmodem User Guide contains explanations of the parameters used in
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dedicated mode using dialup modem 185
After the software parameters have been set up, the JP1 jumpers behind
the front faceplate of the Hayes Smartmodem must be dumb strapped on
both modems. Next, see the Hayes Smartmodem Getting Started Guide to
set up the hardware between the system and the modem.
Table 68
Active and stored profiles of the autodial or originating modem
Active profile:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D0 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q2 &R0 &S0 &X0 &Y0
S00:000 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:002 S07:030
S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S12:050 S14:ACH S16:00H S18:000 S21:20H
S22:76H S23:15H S25:005 S26:001 S27:42H
Stored profile 0:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D0 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q2 &R0 &S0 &X0
S00:000 S14:ACH S18:000 S21:20H S22:76H S23:17H S25:005 S26:001
S27:42H
Stored profile 1:
B1 E1 L2 M1 Q0 V1 X4 Y0 &C0 &D0 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S0 &X0
S00:00 S14:AAH S18:000 S21:00H S22:76H S23:17H S25:005 S26:001
S27:40H
Telephone numbers:
&Z0=ATDT7414011
&Z1=
&Z2=
&Z3=
Table 69
Active and stored profiles of the auto answer or terminating modem
Active profile:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q1 &R0 &S1 &X2 &Y0
S00:001 S01:000 S02:043 S03:013 S04:010 S05:008 S06:002 S07:030
S08:002 S09:006 S10:014 S12:050 S14:ACH S16:00H S18:000 S21:70H
S22:76H S23:15H S25:005 S26:001 S27:61H
Stored profile 0:
B1 E0 L2 M1 Q1 V1 X4 Y0 &C1 &D2 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q1 &R0 &S1 &X2
S00:001 S14:ACH S18:000 S21:70H S22:76H S23:17H S25:005 S26:001
S27:61H
Stored profile 1:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186 ISL installation
B1 E1 L2 M1 Q0 V1 X4 Y0 &C0 &D0 &G0 &J0 &L0 &P0 &Q0 &R0 &S0 &X0
S00:000 S14:AAH S18:000 S21:00H S22:76H S23:17H S25:005 S26:001
S27:40H
Telephone numbers:
&Z0=
&Z1=
&Z2=
&Z3=
Figure 73
ISL dedicated mode, using dialup Hayes Smartmodem 2400
Dedicated mode using PRI/DTI trunks
In this configuration, the DCHI or MSDL is connected to a High Speed Data
Module (HSDM) or Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (ASIM).
HSDM or ASIM is connected to a Data Line Card (DLC). The call is then
connected to the far end through the DLC to DTI trunk path.
To establish the D-channel in this configuration, set up the HSDM or ASIM
at one end in hot line mode. The hot line DN must be coordinated with
personnel at the far end, then programmed in LD11. The preprogrammed
hot line DN is dialed by the system. If the call cannot be established, the
system continues to dial the hot line number continuously until the call is
connected.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dedicated mode using dialup modem 187
Set the HSDM or ASIM must be in synchronous mode. A data rate of 9.6
Kbps is recommended because it provides internal error detection and
correction. The following data rates are also supported: 1.2 Kbps, 2.4 Kbps,
3.6 Kbps, 4.8 Kbps, 7.2 Kbps, 14.4 Kbps, 19.2 Kbps, 38.4 Kbps, and 56
Kbps for ASIM. The High Speed Data Module (HSDM) supports 64 Kbps.
Note 1: This configuration is the least reliable due to the lockup
problems inherent in Smart Modems from power splices and noisy lines.
To increase the reliability on this configuration, a constant power source
can be used when powering the modems. Also ensure that the TIE
lines meet data grade specifications.
Note 2: Nortel takes no responsibility for ISL D-channel outages due to
modem lockup.
Figure 74
ISL dedicated mode: using PRI/DTI trunk
QMT11 switch settings
If using the QMT11 ASIM, set the DIP switches, located on top of the unit
under the flip-up, as follows:
•
•
•
•
•
Hotline, On; See Note 1.
Forced DTR, On; See Note 2.
FDX (full duplex), On
SYNC, On
INTernal CLK, On
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
188 ISL installation
•
•
•
Modem/Network, Modem
Auto Answer, On
Loopback, Off
Note 1: Set only one side of the interface to originate the hot line.
Note 2: Forced Data Terminal Ready (DTR) automatically reinitiates a
dropped hot line call.
QMT8 switch settings
If the QMT8 Asynchronous Data Module (ADM) is used, set the switches as
follows:
Switch 1:
Switch 3:
Switch 4:
1. not used
1. on
set to zeros (no VFDN)
2. not used
2. on (hot line*)
3. FDX (full duplex)
4. modem
3. off (DTR-data
terminal
ready-required)
5. internal clock
6. no echo
4. on (synchronous)
U5 and U7 must be
jumpered
7. auto answer
8. off (no loopback)
* Only one side of the
interface should be set to
originate the hot line.
QMT21C switch settings
If using the QMT21 HSDM, set the dip switches, located on top of the unit
under the flip-up, as follows.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hotline, On; See Note 1.
Forced DTR, On; See Note 2.
FDX (full duplex), On
SYNC, On
INTernal CLK, On
Modem/Network, Modem
Auto Answer, On
Loopback, Off
Note 1: Set only one side of the interface to originate the hot line.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISL installation 189
Note 2: Forced Data Terminal Ready (DTR) automatically reinitiates a
dropped hot line call.
ISL installation
in dedicated mode. Use Procedure 23 "Install ISL in shared mode" (page
Modem paths must have individual configurations: route data blocks, trunks,
and routes.
Install ISL in dedicated mode (digital and analog)
DTI or PRI should already be up and running.
Procedure 22
Install ISL in dedicated mode
Step Action
1
2
In LD17, configure ISL for dedicated mode.
USR = ISLD
ISLM = Number of trunks handled by this D-channel (1-382)
In LD16, configure the Route Data Block to map out the software
parameters for these trunks.
3
4
5
Install the modem with leased line functionality.
In LD14, reassign old trunks to the routes just built in LD16.
In LD16, out the old DTI route. A separate Route Data Block should
be built for Leased Line, or to accommodate the dialing plan for a
dedicated modem.
—End—
Install ISL in shared mode
DTI or PRI should already be up and running.
Procedure 23
Install ISL in shared mode
Step Action
1
2
In LD14, remove the PRI trunks.
In LD17, configure ISL for dedicated mode.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190 ISL installation
USR = SHA
ISLM = Number of trunks handled by this D-channel (1-382)
3
In LD16, build a PRI route data block. This is the same route you just
removed in step 1.
ISDN = YES
4
5
In LD16 build another route data block to correspond to the IAS
routes.
In LD14, assign trunks to the newly configured routes.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
191
Echo canceller installation
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
Introduction
Echo cancellers are required only in cases where satellite transmission is
being used. The echo canceller detects the length of the loop, and cancels
out transmission reflections (which result in audible echoes of voices on
satellite-carried calls).
Echo canceller operating parameters
The operational parameters of the echo canceller must be:
•
•
•
•
Data transfer rate: 4800 baud
System unit number: 1
Display timeout: active
Failures before alarm: 3
Echo canceller initialization procedures
Each of the 24 channels on the echo canceller must be initialized as shown
here:
•
•
Bypass: OFF
Off-hook: ON
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192 Echo canceller installation
•
•
•
Canceller only: OFF
H reset: OFF
H hold: OFF
PRI to Echo canceller pin assignments
The echo canceller is controlled by an RS-232 port on the PRI circuit pack.
The following tables give the echo canceller pin assignments, operating
parameters and initialization procedures.
PRI-to-Echo canceller pin assignments; refer to Figure 75 "PRI to echo
canceller cabling" (page 193) for a PRI-to-Echo-canceller cabling schematic.
Table 70
PRI-to-Echo canceller - pin assignments
EIA RS-232-C
circuit
designator
Echo canceller
pin
Signal
PRI pin
5
2
TXD
BA
BB
CC
CB
AB
CF
CD
(Transmitted Data)
2
3
RXD
(Received Data)
—
—
10
1
4
RTS
(Request to Send)
5
CTS
(Clear to Send)
7
Common Return
(signal ground)
8
DCD
(received line signal detector)
4
20
DTR
(data terminal ready)
Electromagnetic Interference
The Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) filter assembly for PRI is PO643763.
The system meets FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A requirements regarding
EMI. In order to accomplish this, the SDI cables must exit the cabinet
through EMI filters on the I/O panel. This procedure depends on the system
cabinet type.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electromagnetic Interference 193
Figure 75
PRI to echo canceller cabling
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194 Echo canceller installation
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
195
1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview
Digital trunks are supported in the Small System cabinet, the IP expansion
cabinet, and the Media Gateway.
This chapter provides the following information required to install PRI on a
system:
•
•
hardware and software installation
implementation procedures for basic call service
While either the hardware or software can be installed first, the PRI cannot
be enabled and tested until both are completed.
Hardware requirements
Circuit cards
circuit cards" (page 195) is required.
Table 71
Required circuit cards
Description
Circuit card
NTRB21
DTI/PRI TMDI card.
DTI/PRI circuit card.
NTAK09
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Description
Circuit card
NTAK20
Clock-controller daughterboard. Small Systems
supports only one active clock controller per system
or IP expansion cabinet.
Note: Every cabinet/Media Gateway that contains a
digital trunk must contain a clock controller.
NTAK93
D-channel-handler (DCH) interface daughterboard.
NTBK51BA
Downloadable D-channel daughterboard (DDCH).
Connects to the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card.
Cables
The following cables are required for PRI connections:
•
•
•
PRI to external T1 cable
NTBK04 carrier cable
NT8D97 50-foot extension (if needed)
Channel Service Units (CSU)
When connecting the DTI/PRI to the public network, CSUs are required by
most operating companies. One CSU is required per PRI. Suitable CSUs
which support 64 Kbps clear and Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution (B8ZS) are
available from vendors such as Verilink, Digitalink, Kentrox, and Tellabs.
Note: Contact your Nortel Sales representative for specific local CSU
requirements.
Hardware description
Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion
The Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion contain physical card
slots, numbered 1 to 10. When configuring the system, the physical card
slot numbers must be transposed to logical card slot numbers. For example,
to configure a card physically located in slot two of the Media Gateway one,
use logical slot 12. To configure a card physically located in slot two of the
Media Gateway two, use logical Slot 22.
(page 197) maps physical card slot numbers to logical card numbers for the
Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion and reflects added support
for the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion physical card slot 4.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hardware description 197
Table 72
Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion slot assignments
Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion
Third
Physical Logical Physical Logical Physical Logical Physical Logical
First
Fourth
Second
card
slot
card
slot
card
slot
card
slot
card
slot
card
slot
card
slot
card
slot
1
2
11
12
13
14
*
1
2
21
22
23
24
*
1
2
31
32
33
34
*
1
2
41
42
43
44
*
3
3
3
3
Media
Gateway
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
*
*
*
*
7
7
7
7
17
18
19
20
27
28
29
30
37
38
39
40
47
48
49
50
Media
Gateway
Expansion
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
Legend
* Not supported.
NTRB21 TMDI card
The NTRB21 TMDI card provides 1.5 MBit/s Digital Trunk Interface or
Primary Rate Interface functionality on the system. The NTRB21 has a
built-in, downloadable D-channel.
The NTRB21can be equipped with the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card (with the
NTBK51 downloadable D-channel daughterboard) and the NTAK93 DCHI
daughterboard.
Note: A TMDI D-channel programmed as a backup D-channel against a
non-TMDI primary D-channel is not supported. Backup D-channels are
supported only when programmed against TMDI primary D-channels.
Figure 76 "NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate" (page 198) shows a faceplate
of the NTRB21 TMDI card.
Shelf slot assignments
For Small Systems, the NTRB21 can be placed in main and expansion
The Media Gateway Expansion does not support digital trunks (DTI/PRI).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Figure 76
NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate
NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card
The NTAK09 Digital Trunk Interface/Primary Rate Interface (DTI/PRI) card
provides the physical interface for the DS-1 facility T-1 carrier on the
system. It is required for PRI and DTI operation and is also used for ISL
shared-mode applications.
layout, the location of the switch and the position of the daughterboards
and connectors.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hardware description 199
Shelf slot assignments
For cabinet systems, the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card can be placed in main and
Digital trunk cards are not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion.
Figure 77
NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card
NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard
Digital Trunking requires synchronized clocking so a shift in one clock source
results in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all parts of the
network. Synchronization is accomplished with the NTAK20 clock controller
circuit card in each Main and IP expansion cabinet/Media Gateway.
ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Every Small System cabinet or Media Gateway that contains a digital trunk must
contain a clock controller.
If a Small System is equipped with digital trunks, it is recommended that at least
one digital trunk be placed in the main cabinet.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from
different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade
voice quality.
The Clock Controller circuitry synchronizes the system to an external
reference clock, and generates and distributes the clock to the system. A
Small System can function either as a slave to an external clock or as a
clocking master.
The NTAK20AA version of the clock controller meets AT&T Stratum 3 and
Bell Canada Node Category D specifications. The NTAK20BA version
meets CCITT stratum 4 specifications.
Clocking modes
The system supports a single clock controller that can operate in one of two
modes - tracking or non-tracking (also known as free-run).
Tracking mode In tracking mode, one or possibly two DTI/PRI cards
supply a clock reference to a clock controller daughterboard. One DTI/PRI
is defined as the primary reference source for clock synchronization, while
the other is defined as the secondary reference source (PREF and SREF in
LD 73).
There are two stages to clock controller tracking, as follows:
•
•
tracking a reference
locked onto a reference
When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match
its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies
are very nearly matched, the clock controller locks onto the reference. The
clock controller makes small adjustments to its own frequency until incoming
and system frequencies correspond.
If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller tracks
it, locks onto it, and matches frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however,
environmental circumstances cause the external or internal clocks to drift.
When this happens, the internal clock controller briefly enters the tracking
stage. The green LED flashes momentarily until the clock controller locks
onto the reference once again.
If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller is
continuously in the tracking stage, with the LED flashing green all the time.
This condition does not present a problem, instead it shows that the clock
controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. However, if slips
are occurring, there is a problem with the clock controller or the incoming
line.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hardware description 201
Free-run (non-tracking) In free-run mode, the clock controller does not
synchronize on any source, it provides its own internal clock to the system.
This mode can be used when the system is used as a master clock source
for other systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the system
is intended to be a slave. It can occur, however, when both the primary and
secondary clock sources are lost due to hardware faults, or when invoked
by using software commands.
Shelf slot assignment
For cabinet systems, the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card can be placed in main and
Note: For CISPR B group cabinets, the active Clock Controller
(NTAK20) can only occupy slots 1-3, 11-13, 21-23, 31-33, or 41-43 in
an Option 11C cabinet. For FCC and/or CISPR A group cabinets, this
limitation does not exist.
On non-CISPR B system cabinets, the NTAK20 can be placed in slots 1-9 of
the Option 11C main cabinet. On cabinets NTAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx, the
active NTAK20 must be placed in slots 1-3 (slots 4-10 cannot be used.)
On non-CISPR B IP expansion cabinets, the NTAK20 can be placed in slots
11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and fourth expansion
cabinets, respectively.
Clock controller LED states
The clock controller LED, on the NTAK09 or NTRB21 faceplates, is in
various states depending on the status of the clock controller.
Table 73
Clock controller LEDs
LED
Clock controller
On (Red)
On (Green)
NTAK20 is equipped and disabled.
NTAK20 is equipped and is either locked to a reference
or in free run mode.
Flashing (Green)
NTAK20 is equipped and attempting to lock (tracking
mode) to a reference. If the LED flashes continuously
over an extended period of time, check the CC STAT in
LD 60. If the CC is tracking this can be an acceptable
state. Check for slips and related clock controller error
conditions. If none exist, then this state is acceptable,
and the flashing is identifying jitter on the reference.
Off
NTAK20 is not equipped.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Shelf slot assignments for NTRB21, NTAK09 and NTAK20
(page 202) provides the shelf slot assignments for the NTRB21 TMDI card,
NTAK09 DTI/PRI card, and NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard in
Small Systems. The NTAK 93 DCH and NTBK51BA DDCH daughterboards
are not included in this table since they are mounted on the NTAK09
DTI/PRI circuit card and not on a shelf.
Table 74
Shelf slot assignments for NTRB21, NTAK09, and NTAK20
NTAK20
Clock controller
daughterboard
NTAK09
DTI/PRI
circuit card
Non-
CISPR B
cabinets
NTRB21
TMDI card
CISPR B
cabinets
1 – 9
1 – 9
1 – 3
1 – 9
Main
(see Note 2)
11 – 19
21 – 29
31 – 39
41 – 49
11 – 19
21 – 29
31 – 39
41 – 49
11 – 13
21 – 23
31 – 33
41 – 43
11 – 19
21 – 29
31 – 39
41 – 49
Expansion 1
Expansion 2
Expansion 3
Expansion 4
Small
System
Note: On cabinets NTAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx, the active card must be
placed in slots 1 – 3 (slots 4 to 10 cannot be used).
NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface (DCHI) daughterboard
The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard interfaces with the system Central
Processing Unit (CPU) and mounts on the NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card
for PRI or ISL shared mode applications. The DCHI is responsible for
performing the Q.921 layer 2 protocol information. It transfers layer 3
signaling information between two adjacent network switches.
The NTAK93 DCH daughterboard, when installed on the NTAK09 circuit
card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTAK09. The NTAK93 can use
SDI I/O addresses 0 to 79 and port 1.
Note: I/O addresses 0, 1, 2, 8 and 9 are preconfigured on the Small
System and must not conflict with the I/O addresses on the NTAK93
card.
A minimum of one NTAK93 is required for each PRI link. If more than one
PRI link connects to the same end location, a single DCHI circuit card can
support up to a maximum of sixteen PRI connections for the Small System.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install PRI hardware 203
This allows a total of 382 B-channels or PRI trunks to be supported if a
backup D-channel is also used. A total of 383 B-channels or PRI trunks are
supported if a backup channel is not used.
NTBK51BA Downloadable D-channel (DDCH) daughterboard
The NTBK51BA DDCH daughterboard interfaces with the Small System
Central Processing Unit (CPU) and mounts on the NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit
card for PRI D-channel applications. The DDCH is equivalent to the MSDL
card used on a Large System, but it only supports D-channel applications
(no SDI or ESDI).
The NTBK51BA DDCH daughterboard, when installed on the NTAK09
circuit card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTAK09.
A minimum of one NTBK51BA is required for each PRI link. If more than
one PRI link connects to the same end location, a single DDCH circuit
card can support up to a maximum of sixteen PRI connections for the
Small Systems. This allows a total of 382 B-channels or PRI trunks to be
supported if a backup D-channel is also used. A total of 383 B-channels or
PRI trunks are supported if a backup channel is not used.
For more information on expansion daughterboards, refer to Communication
Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Small System Planning and Engineering
(NN43011-220).
Install PRI hardware
Install/remove daughterboard on the NTRB21 TMDI card
Work on a flat surface when mounting or removing daughterboards.
Procedure 24
Mounting the NTAK20 daughterboard on the NTRB21
Step Action
1
Visually inspect the connector pins on the underside of the
daughterboard. Straighten and realign any bent pins prior to
mounting.
2
3
Place the NTRB21 down flat on an antistatic pad.
From an overhead view, with the daughterboard parallel above
the NTRB21 and the connector pins aligned over the connector
sockets, line up the mounting holes on the daughterboard (Figure 78
with the tops of the standoffs on the NTRB21.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
4
Slowly lower the daughterboard towards the NTRB21, keeping the
standoffs in line with all four holes, until the holes are resting on the
tops of the four standoffs.
If more than a very slight amount of pressure is required at this point,
the connector pins cannot be aligned with the connector socket. If
so, lift the daughterboard off the NTRB21 and return to step 2.
5
Gently apply pressure along the edge of the board where the
connector is located until the standoffs at the two corners adjacent
to the connector snap into a locked position. Then press down on
the two corners on the opposite side until they also lock into place.
Figure 78
NTAK20 daughterboard installation on the NTRB21
—End—
Insert/remove the NTRB21 TMDI card
TMDI circuit card appropriate to the system.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install PRI hardware 205
The NTRB21 card is installed only in the Media Gateway. It is not supported
in the Media Gateway Expansion.
Procedure 25
Inserting the NTRB21 TMDI card
Step Action
1
2
Check for available card slots in the base cabinet and print the
configuration record to determine which slots can be used. To do
this, enter the following command in LD 22:
PRT CFN in LD 22
If in PRI mode, enter the following command in LD 96 to software
disable the D-channel:
DIS DCH x
where x is the DCH port number that was assigned in LD 17.
3
4
If the Clock Controller is enabled, enter the following command in LD
60 to software disable it:
DIS CC 0
Hold the NTRB21 by the lock latch, unlock the latch, and slide the
card into the cabinet.
in which to insert the card.
5
6
Enter the following command in LD 96 to enable the TMDI card:
ENL TMDI x ALL
where x is the NTRB21 TMDI card number (DLOP). The card
number associated with an NTRB21 TMDI card is based on the
slot in which the card is installed.
Within about 30 seconds, the D-channel layer 3 should be
established. To confirm, enter the following command in LD 96 to
request the current status of the D-channel:
STAT DCH (N)
The system response is:
DCH N EST OPER
This means that the D-channel is established and operational.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Procedure 26
Removing the NTRB21 TMDI card
Step Action
1
If in PRI mode, enter the following command in LD 96 to software
disable the D-channel:
DIS DCH x
where x is the DCH port number that was assigned in LD 17.
2
3
If the Clock Controller is enabled, enter the following command in LD
60 to software disable it:
DIS CC 0
Enter the following command in LD 96 to disable the NTRB21 TMDI
card:
DIS TMDI x All
where x is the NTRB21 TMDI card number (DLOP). The card
number associated with a NTRB21 TMDI card is based on the slot in
which the card is installed.
4
Hold the NTRB21 by the lock latch, unlock the latch, and slide the
card out from the cabinet.
—End—
Install/remove daughterboards on the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card
Use these guidelines to mount the NTAK20 CC and the NTAK93 DCHI or
NTBK51 DDCH daughterboards on the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card. Because
of the physical layout of the mother and daughterboards, the NTAK93 or
NTBK51 should be mounted before the NTAK20. Work on a flat surface
when mounting or removing daughterboards.
Procedure 27
Mounting the daughterboards on the NTAK09
Step Action
1
Visually inspect the connector pins on the underside of the
daughterboard. Straighten and realign any bent pins prior to
mounting.
2
3
Place the NTAK09 down flat on an antistatic pad.
From an overhead view, with the daughterboard parallel above
the NTAK09 and the connector pins aligned over the connector
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install PRI hardware 207
sockets, align the mounting holes on the daughterboard (Figure 79
tops of the standoffs on the NTAK09.
4
5
Slowly lower the daughterboard toward the NTAK09, keeping the
standoffs in line with all four holes, until the holes rest on top of the
four standoffs.
Note: If more than a very slight amount of pressure is required at
this point, the connector pins are not aligned with the connector
socket. If so, lift the daughterboard off the NTAK09 and return
to step 2.
Gently apply pressure along the edge of the board where the
connector is located until the standoffs at the two corners adjacent to
the connector snap into a locked position. Then press down on the
two corners on the opposite side until they also are locked into place.
—End—
Use these guidelines to remove the NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) and the
NTAK93 DCHI or NTBK51 DDCH daughterboards from the NTAK09 DTI/PRI
card. Because of the physical layout of the mother and daughterboards, the
NTAK20 should be removed before the NTAK93 or NTBK51.
Procedure 28
Removing the daughterboards from the NTAK09
Step Action
1
2
Starting at the two corners opposite the connector, gently lift each
corner out of the locking groove of the standoff.
At the two corners adjacent to the connector, gently lift the entire
side until the mounting holes are clear of the locking groove of the
standoff.
3
To remove the connector pins, grasp the edge of the board adjacent
to the connector and lift gently.
If more than one NTAK09 card is installed, the additional cards might
not carry daughterboards, depending on the system configuration.
At least one NTAK20 (per system) is always required.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Figure 79
Daughterboard installation on the NTAK09
Set switches on NTAK09 DTI/PRI card
Table 75
NTAK09 switch settings
Distance to digital
cross connect
1
2
3
4
DCH F/W
(LEN 0)
(LEN 1)
(LEN 2)
0 - 133 feet
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
133 - 266 feet
266 - 399 feet
399 - 533 feet
533 - 655 feet
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install PRI hardware 209
Installing the NTAK09
DTI/PRI circuit card appropriate to the system.
The NTAK09 DTI/PRI card is installed only in the Media Gateway. It is not
supported in the Media Gateway Expansion.
Procedure 29
Installing the NTAK09
Step Action
1
Check for available card slots in the base and expansion cabinets,
and Media Gateway systems and print the configuration record to
determine which slots can be used. To do this, enter the following
command in LD 22:
PRT CFN
2
Hold the NTAK09 by the lock latch, unlock the latch, and slide the
card into the cabinet.
in which to insert the card.
—End—
The only cable required to support the NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card is the
NTBK04 cable. The cable is twenty feet long. If additional distance is
required, the NT8D97AX fifty-foot extension is available up to a 600 foot
Procedure 30
Connecting the cables
Step Action
1
2
Connect the NTBK04 cable to a 50-pin Amphenol connector on the
cabinet.
For a Small System, the Amphenol connector is located below the
card slot in which the NTAK09 circuit card is installed.
Connect the other end of the cable to the CSU or DSX-1 cross
connect.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Table 76
DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable
From 50-pin
Signal
MDF connector
To DB-15 name
Description
pin 48
pin 23
pin 1
T
transmit tip to
network
pin 9
R
transmit ring to
network
pin 25
pin 49
pin 2
pin 3
FGND
T1
frame ground
receive tip from
network
pin 24
pin 11
R1
receive ring from
network
—End—
Procedure 31
Enabling the NTRB21 TMDI card
Step Action
1
Enter the following command in LD 96 to enable the NTRB21 TMDI
card:
ENL TMDI x ALL
where x is the NTRB21 TMDI card number (DLOP). The card
number associated with a NTRB21 TMDI card is based on the slot in
which the card is installed.
2
3
If in PRI mode, enter the following command in LD 96 to software
enable the D-channel:
ENL DCH y
where y is the DCH port number that was assigned in LD 17.
Within about 30 seconds, the D-channel layer 3 should be
established. To confirm, enter the following command in LD 60 to
request the current status of the D-channel:
STAT DCH (N)
The system response is:
DCH N EST OPER
This means that the D-channel is established and operational.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install PRI hardware 211
—End—
Procedure 32
Enabling the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card
Step Action
The DCHI and PRI cards must be configured prior to software enabling the
(page 212) for further information.
1
Enter the following command in LD 60 to software enable all NTAK09
DTI/PRI cards:
ENLL C
where C is the DTI/PRI card number (DLOP). The card number
associated with a DTI/PRI card is based on the slot in which the
card is installed.
Under normal conditions, this step enables the clock controller and
D-channel interface. If enable fails, enter the following command in
LD 60 to software enable clock tracking on the primary digital card:
ENL CC 0
2
3
Enter the following command in LD 96 to software enable the
NTAK93 (DCHI) daughterboard:
ENL DCHI N
where N is the DCHI I/O address.
Within about 30 seconds, the D-channel layer 3 should be
established. To confirm, enter the following command in LD 60 to
request the current status of the D-channel:
STAT DCH (N)
The system response is:
DCH N EST OPER
This means that the D-channel is established and operational.
—End—
Use this procedure to configure the PRI cards, DCHI interface, DCH link and
ISDN trunk route and trunks (B-channels) that are required to implement
PRI between systems. No feature applications other than Basic Call Service
are included in the implementation.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
PRI cards must be configured before defining the DCH links or PRI
applications.
Prompts which do not show a response can be left as default. For more
information on any of these prompts, refer to Software Input Output
Administration (NN43001-611).
Before installing PRI cards in an IP expansion cabinet/Media Gateway,
first configure the expansion cabinet/Media Gateway for IP connectivity.
Refer to LD 117 in the Software Input Output Reference — Maintenance
(NN43001-711) for further information.
To implement PRI on the system:
Procedure 33
Implementing basic PRI
Step Action
1
2
3
Add a DCHI card. "LD 17 - Adding a PRI card" (page 212)
Define a PRI customer. "LD 15 - Defining a PRI customer" (page
4
5
6
Define a PRI service route. "LD 16 - Configuring an ISDN service
Define clock synchronization. "LD 73 - Defining system timers and
—End—
LD 17 - Adding a PRI card
Prompt
REQ
Response
CHG
Description
Change existing data.
Configuration data block.
Changes to common equipment.
TYPE
CEQU
PRI
CFN
YES
loop x card x For Large Systems and Small Systems
TMDI
(Yes)
No
TMDI Card (Mode set to PRI OR TRK) Option 11C Cabinet Other card
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install PRI hardware 213
LD 17 - Adding a D-channel interface
Prompt
REQ
Response
CHG
Description
Change existing data.
Action Device And Number.
TYPE
ADAN
- ADAN
NEW DCH xx
CHG DCH xx
OUT DCH xx
Add a primary D-channel (any unused SDI port.)
Change a primary D-channel.
Remove the primary D-channel, where:
xx =0-79.
- CTYP
DCHI
MSDL
TMDI
1-50
DCHI = D-channel configuration for the NTAK09 card or
NTAK93.
MSDL = NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel daughterboard.
TMDI = D-channel configuration on TMDI (NTRB21) card.
Card slot number to be used as the primary DDCH/DCHI.
- CDNO
Card slots 10, 20, 30, 40, and 50 are only applicable for
D-channel configuration of ISL or VNS.
1
- PORT
- DES
PORT must be set to 1.
Designator.
<CR>
PRI
- USR
D-channel is for ISDN PRI only.
Interface type.
xx
- IFC
xx
- - DCHL
- OTBF
PRI loop number.
1-(16)-127
Number of output request buffers.
Note: For a single PRI link, leave this prompt at default (16).
Add 5 output request buffers per additional link.
- DRAT
- SIDE
64KC
D-channel transmission rate.
NET (USR)
Prompted only if IFC is set to SL1.
NET = network, the controlling switch.
USR = slave to the controller.
xx
- RLS
Release ID of the switch at the far-end of the D-channel.
Remote capability.
- RCAP
- OVLR
ND2
YES (NO)
Allow or disallow overlap receiving on a D-channel. Default
is NO. Enter carriage return if settings are to be left at
default.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Prompt
Response
Description
- LAPD
YES (NO)
Change LAPD parameters. Enter carriage return if timers
are to be left at default. The following timers are prompted
only if LAPD is set to YES. (They can all be left at default
during initial setup.)
- - T23
1-(20)-31
2-(3)-40
Interface guard timer checks how long the interface takes to
respond. In units of 0.5 seconds (default 20 = 10 seconds).
- - T200
Retransmission timer in units of 0.5 seconds (default 3 =
1.5 seconds).
- - N200
- - N201
- - K
1-(3)-8
4(260)
1-(7)-32
Maximum number of retransmissions.
Maximum number of octets in information field.
Maximum number of outstanding unacknowledged frames
(NAKS).
LD 15 - Defining a PRI customer
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ:
NEW
CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE:
CUST
NET
Networking Data.
Customer number
0-99
Range for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and Media
Gateway 1000E
0-31
xxxx
Range for Small System, Media Gateway 1000B
LDN0
Listed Directory number 0 must be defined for ISDN PRI
DID service.
The length of LDN0 determines the number of trailing digits
translated as the dialed DN on PRI DID routes.
Up to seven digits can be entered if DNXP option 150 is
equipped. Otherwise, up to four digits can be entered.
AC2
ESN Access Code 2. Enter incoming ISDN call types
(NARS network translation types) for which AC2 must be
inserted when INAC = YES in LD 16.
Multiple responses are allowed. Prompted only if NARS
is equipped. If a NARS call type is not entered here, it is
defaulted to AC1.
NPA
NXX
INTL
SPN
LOC
E.164 National.
E.164 Subscriber.
International.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install PRI hardware 215
Prompt
Response
Description
Special Number.
Location Code
ISDN
- PNI
YES
Customer is equipped with ISDN.
(0) 1-32700
Private Network Identifier. Each customer data block must
have a unique PNI when multi-customer option is equipped.
PNI = 1 is typical for CUST = 0. It must be matched by
the PNI in the far-end RDB.
Note: Using the default value of PNI = 0 prevents operation
of features like NRAG, NACD and NMS.
- HNPA
- HNXX
NPA
NXX
Telephone area code for this system. Sent as part of setup
message as calling line identification.
Telephone local exchange code for this system. Sent as
part of setup message as calling line identification.
- - HLOC
- - LSC
XXX
Home location code (NARS), prompted when PRA = YES.
1-9999
One to four digit Local Steering Code, if required in the
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP). LSCs are required only if
the CDP DNs are longer than the local PDNs.
The CLID sent for a CDP call is composed of the LSC
defined in LD 15 plus the PDN of the calling set. Various
ISDN network features depend on the CLID as the "return
address" for sending feature control messages.
Multiple LSCs can be defined in LD 87 for CDP, but only
one LSC can be defined here for CLID.
LD 16 - Configuring an ISDN service route
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ
NEW
CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE
RDB
xxx
Route data block.
TKTP
Trunk type.
DTRK
- DGTP
ISDN
YES
PRI
Digital trunk route.
1.5 Mb PRI. Prompted only if PRA = YES in LD15.
ISDN option.
YES
PRA
- MODE
Route used for PRA only.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Prompt
Response
Description
- - PNI
(0) 1-32700
Private Network Identifier. Each customer data block must
have a unique PNI when multi-customer option is equipped.
PNI = 1 is typical for CUST = 0. It must be matched by
the PNI in the far-end RDB.
Note: Using the default value of PNI = 0, prevents operation
of features like NRAG, NACD and NMS.
xx
IFC
Interface type.
- CHTY
BCH
Signalling type - prompted if DTRK is YES. D-channel
signalling for B-channels.
- CTYP
<CR>
Call Type. Enter the call type to be associated with the
outgoing route for direct dialing using the trunk access
code (instead of NARS access code).
See the Software Input Output Administration
(NN43001-611) for a listing of possible responses.
- INAC
YES
Insert ESN Access Code based on NARS/BARS call
type for incoming calls on TIE routes only. If NARS is
equipped, this feature inserts AC1 or AC2, depending on
the responses to AC2 in LD 15 Customer Data Block.
For NARS/BARS call types, INAC bypasses incoming digit
insertion specified by INST in LD 16 Route Data Block.
Unknown call types, including CDP steering codes, are
not affected by INAC, and do not bypass digit insertion
specified by INST.
INAC must be set to YES to support features such as
Network ACD and Network Message Services, which
depend on non-call associated TCAP facility messages.
LD 14 - Defining service channels and PRI trunks
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ
NEW
CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
When assigning several members at once use the multiple
create command NEW XX.
TYPE
TN
TIE
l ch
TIE Trunk only, allowed between MSL-1.
Loop and channel for digital trunks
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install PRI hardware 217
Prompt
Response
Description
RTMB
Route number and Member number
0-511 1-510
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-127 1-4000
Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway 1000B.
LD 73 - Defining system timers and clock controller parameters
Prompt
REQ
Response
CHG
PRI
Description
Change existing data.
1.5 Mb PRI.
TYPE
FEAT
SYTI
xx
System timers.
CCO
Card slot number for Clock Controller 0.
xx
PREF CCO
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet
xx
SREF CCO
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet
xx
xx
xx
CC1
Card number for Clock Controller 1.
PREF CC1
SREF CC1
Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one.
Secondary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller
one.
xx
xx
CC2
Card number for Clock Controller 2.
PREF CC2
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.
xx
SREF CC2
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.
xx
xx
CC3
Card number for Clock Controller 3.
PREF CC3
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.
xx
SREF CC3
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.
xx
xx
CC4
Card number for Clock Controller 4.
PREF CC4
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.
xx
SREF CC4
CCAR
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.
0-(15)
Clock Controller Audit Rate.
Enter the time (in minutes) between normal CC audits.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218 1.5 Mb PRI implementation
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
219
1.5 Mb DTI implementation
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview
This chapter provides the information required to install DTI on a system,
including:
•
•
hardware and software installation
implementation procedures for basic call service
This chapter covers the most common type of Nortel DTI installation – a
24-channel Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) installation between two systems,
or between a system and a central office.
Digital trunks are supported in Small System IP expansion cabinets.
Hardware requirements
hardware" (page 219) is required:
Table 77
DTI hardware
Item
Description
NTRB21
DTI/PRI TMDI card
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220 1.5 Mb DTI implementation
Item
Description
NTAK09
NTAK20
DTI/PRI Circuit card
Clock Controller Daughter board.
Option 11C Cabinet support only one active Clock
Controller per IP Expansion cabinet.
NTBK04
Carrier Cable
Cables
The following cables are required for DTI connections:
•
•
•
DTI to external T1 cable
NTBK04 carrier cable
NT8D97 50-foot extension (if needed)
Channel Service Units (CSU)
When connecting the DTI/PRI to the public network, Channel Service Units
(CSUs) are required by most operating companies. One CSU is required
per DTI. Suitable CSUs which support 64 Kbps clear and Bipolar 8 Zero
Substitution (B8ZS) are available from vendors such as Verilink, Digitalink,
Kentrox and Tellabs.
Contact your Nortel Sales representative for specific local CSU
requirements.
Hardware description
Install DTI hardware
DTI hardware. Specifically:
•
•
•
Set the switches
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install DTI hardware 221
Table 78
NTAK09 switch settings
Distance to digital
crossconnect
1
2
3
4
DCH F/W (LEN 0)
(LEN 1)
(LEN 2)
0 - 133 feet
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
133 - 266 feet
266 - 399 feet
399 - 533 feet
533 - 655 feet
Connect the cables
For Small Systems, connect the NTBK04 cable to the 50-pin amphenol
connector below the card slot in which the NTAK09 circuit card is installed.
Connect the other end of the cable to the CSU or DSX-1 cross connect.
The NTBK04 is twenty feet long. If additional distance is required, the
NT8D97AX 50-foot extension is available up to a 600-foot maximum. The
only cable required to support the NTAK09 circuit card is the NTBK04.
Table 79
DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable
From 50-pin
MDF connector
to DB-15
Description
Signal
name
pin 48
pin 23
pin 1
pin 9
T
transmit tip to network
R
transmit ring to
network
pin 25
pin 49
pin 2
pin 3
FGND
T1
frame ground
receive tip from
network
pin 24
pin 11
R1
receive ring from
network
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222 1.5 Mb DTI implementation
Software enable the DTI/PRI cards
Procedure 34
Enabling the NTRB21 TMDI card
Step Action
1
Enter the following command in LD 96 to enable the NTRB21 TMDI
card:
ENL TMDI x ALL
where
x is the NTRB21 TMDI card number (DLOP). The card number
associated with a NTRB21 TMDI card is based on the slot in
which the card is installed.
2
3
If in DTI mode, enter the following command in LD 96 to software
enable the D-channel:
ENL DCH y
where
y is the DCH port number that was assigned in LD 17.
Within about 30 seconds, the D-channel layer 3 should be
established. To confirm, enter the following command in LD 60 to
request the current status of the D-channel:
STAT DCH (N)
The system response is:
DCH N EST OPER
This means that the D-channel is established and operational.
—End—
The DCHI and DTI cards must be implemented prior to software enabling
(page 212) for further information.
Procedure 35
Enabling the NTAK09 card
Step Action
1
Enter the following command in LD 60 to software enable all NTAK09
DTI/PRI cards:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software enable the DTI/PRI cards 223
ENLL C
where
C is the DTI/PRI card number (DLOP). The card number
associated with a DTI/PRI card is based on the slot in which the
card is installed.
Under normal conditions, this step enables the clock controller and
D-channel interface. If enable fails, go to step 2.
2
3
Optional: Enter the following command in LD 60 to enable clock
tracking on the primary digital card:
ENL CC 0
Enter the following command in LD 96 to software enable the
NTAK93 (DCHI) daughterboard:
ENL DCHI N
where
N is the DCHI I/O address.
4
Within about 30 seconds, the D-channel layer 3 should be
established. To confirm, enter the following command in LD 60 to
request the current status of the D-channel:
STAT DCH (N)
The system response is:
DCH N EST OPER
This means that the D-channel is established and operational.
—End—
Use this procedure to implement the DTI software interface between
systems or between a system and a central office.
Procedure 36
Implementing DTI
Step Action
1
2
Configure a DTI trunk route. See "LD 16 - Configuring a DTI trunk
3
Configure the trunks. See "LD 14 - Configuring the trunks" (page
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224 1.5 Mb DTI implementation
4
—End—
LD 17 - Adding a DTI card
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
...
Response
Description
CHG
CFN
Change existing data.
Configuration data block.
PARM
...
YES
PCML
(MU) A
System PCM law.
Default is MU law.
...
CEQU
DLOP
MODE
TMDI
YALM
YES
Changes to common equipment.
Digital Trunk Interface Loop or Loops
Select Digital Trunk Interface mode.
Whether the card is a TMDI card.
ll dd ff
TRK
(YES) NO
DG2 (FDL)
Yellow alarm method — prompted only if the frame format
is ESF — Must match the far end.
Use FDL with ESF and use DG2 with non-ESF. If not
prompted then DG2 is set automatically.
0-15
TRSH
T1TE
The maintenance and threshold table to be used for this
DTI card, as configured in LD 73.
0 1 2
T1 Transmit Equalization (0=0-200 ft., 1=200-400 ft,
2=400-700 ft). Only for TMDI = YES.
LD 16 - Configuring a DTI trunk route
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ
NEW
CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE
TKTP
RDB
Route data block.
Create a trunk route.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Software enable the DTI/PRI cards 225
Prompt
Response
Description
COT
WAT
DID
Central Office Trunk data block WATS Trunk data block
Direct Inward Dial Trunk data block TIE Trunk data block
Foreign Exchange
TIE
FEX
DTRK
YES
Digital trunk route.
LD 14 - Configuring the trunks
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ
NEW
CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
xxx
TYPE
TN
Trunk type
l ch
Loop and channel for digital trunks
0-511 1-4000
RTMB
Route number and Member number
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
0-127 1-4000
Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway
1000B.
LD 73 - Assigning a clock reference source
Prompt
REQ
Response
CHG
DDB
xx
Description
Change existing data.
Digital Data Block.
TYPE
CCO
Card slot number for Clock Controller 0.
xx
PREF CCO
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet
xx
SREF CCO
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
CC1
Card number for Clock Controller 1.
PREF CC1
SREF CC1
CC2
Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one.
Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one.
Card number for Clock Controller 2.
PREF CC2
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.
xx
SREF CC2
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.
xx
xx
CC3
Card number for Clock Controller 3.
PREF CC3
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226 1.5 Mb DTI implementation
Prompt
Response
Description
xx
SREF CC3
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.
xx
xx
CC4
Card number for Clock Controller 4.
PREF CC4
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.
xx
SREF CC4
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC
containing the primary clock reference.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
227
1.5 Mb ISL implementation
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview
This chapter contains the information required to implement ISL on the
system. It describes:
•
•
hardware and software installation
hardware and software configuration for basic call service
Two modes of ISL are available: shared and dedicated. This chapter covers
the most common type of Nortel ISL installation, an ISDN Signaling Link
(ISL) installation in dedicated mode using dedicated and leased lines.
Hardware requirements
To implement ISL regardless of operation mode, analog or digital TIE lines
are used as B-channels:
•
•
•
NT8D15 or NT8D14 Analog TIE Trunk cards
NTAK09 Digital trunk cards (for shared mode)
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card (for dedicated mode)
Shared mode
In shared mode, PRI hardware plus the existing TIE line interface card is
required.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228 1.5 Mb ISL implementation
Dedicated mode
Dedicated mode requires modems. See Figure 80 "ISL in dedicated mode
dialup modem" (page 229) for details.
The requirements for using a leased line are
Table 80
Leased line requirements
Hardware
Comments
NTAK02
D-channel Handler Interface
(DCHI) Card for ISL mode.
Modem
Modem capable of the following:
(such as Ventel 2400-33 or 2400 Plus II)
•
•
•
minimum of 2400 baud
synchronous operation
must support leased line (also known as private
line or point-to-point) operation
NTAK19BA
Four port break out cable.
Figure 80
ISL in dedicated mode using leased line
Using dialup modems
The requirements for using a dialup modem are:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISL hardware installation (dedicated mode) 229
Table 81
Dial-up modem requirements
Hardware
NT8D09
NTAK02
Comments
500 set line card.
D-channel Handler Interface (DCHI) Card (for ISL
mode).
Modem
Modem capable of the following: (such as Ventel
2400-33 or 2400 Plus II)
•
•
•
minimum of 2400 baud
synchronous operation
modems are programmed such that one
modem originates the call while the other
auto-answers
•
auto dial capability
NTAK19BA
Four port break out cable.
Figure 81
ISL in dedicated mode using dialup modem
ISL hardware installation (dedicated mode)
for an ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) in dedicated mode using dedicated
leased lines. For shared mode, hardware installation is identical to the PRI
addition of analog or digital TIE Trunks or both.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230 1.5 Mb ISL implementation
The NTAK02 connects to a modem via the NTAK19BA four-port cable. Only
ports 1 and 3 are available for use as DCHIs.
Procedure 37
Installing ISL hardware
Step Action
1
jumper settings" (page 230) for mode of operation (RS232 or RS422
and DTE or DCE.)
Table 82
NTAK02 switch setting
Port 0
SDI
SDI
—
Port 1
DCH
SW 1-1
OFF
SW 1-2
OFF
ON
DPNSS
ESDI
OFF
ON
ON
Port 2
SDI
SDI
—
Port 3
DCH
SW 1-3
OFF
SW 1-4
OFF
ON
DPNSS
ESDI
OFF
ON
ON
Table 83
NTAK02 jumper settings
Unit
Jumper location
Strap for DTE
Strap for DCE
Unit 0
Unit 1
J10
C - B
B - A
J7
J6
C - B
C - B
B - A
B - A
Unit 2
Unit 3
J5
C - B
B - A
J4
J3
C - B
C - B
B - A
B - A
Unit
Jumper location
RS422
RS232
—
—
—
Unit 0
Unit 1
J9
J8
C - B
C - B
B - A
B - A
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISL hardware installation (dedicated mode) 231
Unit
Jumper location
RS422
RS232
—
—
—
Unit 2
Unit 3
J2
J1
C - B
C - B
B - A
B - A
2
3
4
Install the NTAK02 in any available slot 1-10 of the Option
11C Cabinet or slot 11-14 of Media Gateway 1.
Install the NTAK19BA four-port cable on the 50-pin Amphenol
connector associated with the slot the NTAK02 is installed in.
If the installation is a dedicated mode using leased line modem
configuration, the D-channel connects the DCHI with the far-end
modem over a dedicated leased line. The modems must have a
minimum transmission rate of 2400 baud and must support leased
line capability and synchronous mode, 2-wire or 4-wire operation.
Modems such as Ventel 2400 Plus II can be used. You must specify
4-wire operation when ordering. Otherwise, the modem is factory
shipped for 2-wire operation.
Note: The Hayes Smart modem 2400 cannot be used on leased
lines.
5
6
If the installation is a dedicated mode using dialup modem (such as
Hayes 2400, Ventel 2400 or Gandalf 2400) configuration, the DCHI is
connected to a modem that is connected to a 500 set line card. The
call is connected to the far-end via the 500 set-to-TIE Trunk path.
Note: Dedicated mode using leased line modems is the
preferred method.
Set up the D-channel. Configure the modem at one end in the
autodial mode so it automatically initiates a call to the other end at
power-up. The autodial number must be coordinated with the far-end
switch. The originating modem must have this autodial number
stored internally as part of the modem configuration routine. The
far-end modem must be configured for auto-answer.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232 1.5 Mb ISL implementation
Basic ISL implementation
Implement dedicated mode
basic ISL capability. It applies to analog TIE Trunks that are used as
B-channels. When DTI/PRI trunks are also used, LD 17 digital loop (DLOP)
and LD 73 (digital data block-DDB) must also be configured with the
appropriate clocking and threshold settings.
The DCHI in this case uses the NTAK02 circuit card and does not support
ISDN PRI signaling. The DCHI is reserved for ISL use only. The D-channel
can communicate with the far-end by means of a dedicated leased line
modem or dialup modem.
For ISL dedicated mode using a dialup modem, a 500 set, TIE Trunk route
and member have to be configured (used for D-channel).
Configuring dedicated mode involves four major steps:
Procedure 38
Implementing dedicated mode
Step Action
1
2
3
Configure the D-channel for ISL (LD 17).
Enable ISDN option (LD 15).
Enable the ISL option on a per route basis, assigning a D-channel
for each route (LD 16).
4
Assign a channel identification to each trunk with the ISL option
(LD 17).
—End—
LD 17 - Configuring the D-channel for ISL
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ
NEW
CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE
ADAN
CTYP
CDNO
CFN
Configuration data block.
Add primary D-channel.
D-channel card type.
NEW DCH 0-79
DCHI
1-9 11-19 21-29
31-39 41-49
Card slot in which the card supporting the DCHI
resides.
1
PORT
USR
Must be set to 1.
PRI
D-channel for ISDN PRI only.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic ISL implementation 233
Prompt
IFC
Response
SL1
Description
Interface type.
1-9
DCHL
SIDE
PRI card number (Must match entry for CDNO).
Net: network, the controlling switch.
NET (USR)
User: slave to controller.
RLS
XX
Software release of far-end. This is the current
software release of the far-end. If the far-end
has an incompatible release of software, it
prevents the sending of application messages,
for example, Network Ring Again.
CLOK
D-channel clock type for signaling.
EXT
Source of D-channel clock is external to DCHI
card (in this case, the DTI/PRI circuit card).
Normally, EXT is used for PRI/ISL.
Do not confuse this clock with the E1 span Clock
Controller found on the NTAK10/79. This clock
is in reference to the DCHI synchronous mode of
operation. Note: If directly connecting two DCHI
ports without modems, set "CLOK" to "EXT" on
one side and "INT" on the other.
LAPD
YES (NO)
Change LAPD parameters. Enter <cr> to leave
timers at default value. The following timers
are prompted only if LAPD is set to YES. The
following can all be left at default during initial
setup.
T23
1-(20)-31
2-(3)-40
Interface guard timer checks how long the
interface takes to respond. In units of 0.5
seconds (default 20 = 10 seconds).
T200
Retransmission timer in units of 0.5 seconds
(default 3 = 1.5 seconds).
N200
N201
K
1-(3)-8
4(260)
1-(7)-32
Maximum number of retransmissions.
Maximum number of octets in information field.
Maximum number of outstanding
unacknowledged frames (NAKS).
LD 73 - Configuring the D-channel for ISL
Prompt
REQ
Response
NEW CHG
DDB
Description
Add new data. Change existing data.
Digital data block.
TYPE
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234 1.5 Mb ISL implementation
Prompt
TRSH
RALM
BIPC
Response
0-15
Description
Assign a threshold set or table.
Yellow alarm 24-hour threshold.
24-hour bit rate violation threshold.
24-hour loss of frame alignment threshold.
1-(3)-128
1-(2)-128
1-(3)-128
LFAC
BIPV
1-(3)-4
1-(2)-4
Bit rate (bipolar violation and CRC) monitoring limits for
maintenance and out-of-service thresholds.
SRTK
SRNT
LFAL
1-(5)-24
1-(30)-3600
Frame slip-tracking-monitoring limits (in hours).
1-(15)1024
1-(3)-1024
Non-tracking slip-rate monitoring maintenance and
out-of-service thresholds.
1-(17)-10240
1-(511)-10240
Loss of frame alignment monitoring limits.
SRIM
(1)-127
Slip rate improvement timer.
SRMM
1-(2)-127
Maximum number of times the slip rate exceeds the
maintenance limit.
LD 15 - Enabling ISDN option
Prompt
REQ:
Response
NEW CHG
NET
Description
Add new data. Change existing data.
Networking data.
TYPE:
CUST
0-99
Customer number Range for Large System, Call Server
1000E, and Media Gateway 1000E
0-31
Range for Small System, Media Gateway 1000B
Customer is equipped with ISDN.
ISDN
PNI
YES
1-32700
Customer private network identifier. This number MUST be
unique to this customer in the private network. It is used to
as part of the setup message for feature operation such as
Network Ring Again and Network ACD.
HNPA
HNXX
NPA
NXX
Telephone area code for this system. Sent as part of setup
message as calling line identification.
Telephone local exchange code for this system. Sent as
part of setup message as calling line identification.
HLOC
LSC
XXX
Home location code (NARS).
1-9999
One to four digit Local Steering Code established in the
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP). The LSC prompt is
required for Calling Line I.D. and Network ACD.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic ISL implementation 235
Prompt
Response
Description
AC2
Access Code 2. Enter call types (type of number) that use
access code 2. Multiple responses are permitted. This
prompt only appears on NARS equipped systems. If a call
type is not entered here, it is automatically defaulted to
access code 1.
NPA
NXX
INTL
SPN
LOC
E.164 National.
E.164 Subscriber.
International.
Special Number.
Location Code.
LD 16 - Enabling ISL option on a per-route basis, assigning a D-channel for each route
Prompt
REQ
Response
NEW CHG
RDB
Description
Add new data. Change existing data.
Route data block.
TYPE
CUST
ROUT
xx
Customer number as defined in LD 15.
0-511
Route number Range for Large System and CS 1000E
system.
0-127
TIE
Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway 1000B
TIE Trunk route.
TKTP
DTRK
ISDN
MODE
DCHI
YES/NO
YES
Enter YES if this is a Digital Trunk Interface (DTI or PRI).
ISDN option.
ISLD
XX
Route for ISL application.
DCHI port number in CFN which carries the D-channel for
this TIE Trunk route.
1-32700
PNI
IFC
Customer private network identifier. Must be the same as
the CDB PNI at the far-end.
Interface type.
Interface type
SL1
CTYP
<CR>
Call Type. Enter the call type to be associated with the
outgoing route for direct dialing using the trunk access code
(instead of NARS access code). See the Software Input
Output Reference — System Messages (NN43001-712)
for a list of valid responses.
INAC
YES
Insert Access Code. Permits the NARS AC1 or AC2
access code to be reinserted automatically on an incoming
ESN call.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236 1.5 Mb ISL implementation
LD 14 - Assigning a channel identification to each trunk with the ISL option
Prompt
REQ
Response
NEW CHG
TIE
Description
Add new data. Change existing data.
TIE Trunk type.
TYPE
TN
l ch
Loop and channel for digital trunks
0-511 1-4000
RTMB
Route number and Member number Range for Large
System and CS 1000E system.
0-127 1-4000
1-192
Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway
1000B.
CHID
Channel identifier for ISL channels (remove with Xnn) must
be coordinated with far-end (no default value).
Implement shared mode
The same DTI/PRI software implementation sequence can be used as for
Dedicated mode with the following exceptions:
LD 17
Prompt
USR
Response
Description
SHA
D-channel for ISL in "shared" mode, used for both ISDN
PRI and ISL.
1-192
ISLM
Number of ISL B-channel (trunks) controlled by the
D-channel (no default value).
LD 16
Prompt
IFC
Response
Description
SL1
Interface type must be SL1 (this is the only type supported
for ISL).
MODE
DCHI
ISLD
0-15
TIE route used for ISL members.
DCHI port number.
LD 14
Prompt
CHID
Response
Description
1-192
Channel identifier for ISL channels. Must be coordinated
with the far-end.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
237
2.0 Mb DTI implementation
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview
This chapter provides the information required to install the 2.0 Mb Digital
Trunk Interface (DTI) card in a system. It includes information for:
•
•
hardware installation
software implementation
Hardware requirements
Hardware requirements for 2.0 Mb DTI are as follows:
•
2.0 Mb DTI Circuit card - NTAK10
(a Clock Controller is incorporated into the circuit card)
CEPT Cable – NTBK05DA (120 3/4 twisted pair – 6.15 m length)
CEPT Cable – NTBK05CA (75 3/4 coaxial – 6.15 m length)
•
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238 2.0 Mb DTI implementation
Figure 82
2.0 Mb DTI cabling
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card
The 2.0 Mb DTI card provides the physical interface for the digital E-1
carrier on the system. The card includes an onboard clock controller and is
installed in slots 1 through 9 in the Option 11C Cabinet. On IP Expansion
cabinets, it is placed in slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second,
third, and fourth expansion cabinets, respectively.
The NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card is also used for ISL shared mode applications.
For information on the NTAK10 faceplate LEDs, refer to ISDN Primary Rate
Interface Maintenance (NN43001-717).
Install DTI hardware
The NTAK10 circuit card is installed in card slot 1-9 in the Option 11C
Cabinet. On IP Expansion cabinets, it is installed in slots 11-19, 21-29,
31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and fourth expansion cabinets,
respectively.
It is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four digital trunk
cards are supported in each Media Gateway. The NTAK10 card is installed
in Slots 1, 2, 3 and 4 of the Media Gateway.
ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller set to
an external reference clock.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install DTI hardware 239
Inspect the NTAK10 circuit card
Inspect the circuit card before installing it in the Option 11C Cabinet or
Media Gateway:
•
Locate the NTAK10 2.0 Mb circuit card and carefully remove it from its
packaging.
•
Inspect the circuit card for any visible damage that occurred during
shipping.
Set the switches
The NTAK10 incorporates four surface mounted dip switches. The following
tables provide information on the various settings and related functions of
these switches.
Note: The ON position for all the switches is toward the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to
the bottom left corner of each individual switch.
Set the switches on the circuit card according to the requirements of your
installation.
Switch S1 - Clock Controller (CC) configuration
This switch enables and disables the onboard Clock Controller (CC).
Table 84
Switch S1
Switch
S1-1
Off (Up)
On (Down)
Spare
Spare
S1-2
Clock Controller
Enabled
Clock Controller
Disabled
Switch S2 - Carrier impedance configuration
This switch sets the carrier impedance to either 1203/4 or 753/4. Twisted pair
cable is usually associated with 1203/4. Coaxial cable is usually associated
with the 753/4 setting.
Table 85
Switch S2
Switch
S2-1
Off (Up)
1203/4
753/4
On (Down)
753/4
S2-2
1203/4
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240 2.0 Mb DTI implementation
Switch S3 - Mode of operation
This switch selects the operational mode for the NTAK10. The NTAK10
supports firmware that allows it to operate in the standard CEPT format
mode or the modified CEPT format used in France.
Table 86
Switch S3
Switch
S3-1
Off (Up)
On (Down)
French Firmware
Spare
Non-French Firmware
Spare
S3-2
Switch S4 - Carrier shield grounding
This switch supports selective shield grounding of the Tx and/or Rx pairs of
the carrier cable. Closing the switch (down position) applies Frame Ground
(FGND) to the coaxial carrier cable shield, creating a 753/4 unbalanced
configuration. The Tx and Rx pairs are referenced with respect to the 2.0
Mb DTI card that is, Rx is carrier received from the far-end device.
Table 87
Switch S4
Switch
Off (Up)
On (Down)
S4-1
Receive Shield
Unconnected
Frame Ground on
Receive Shield
S4-2
Transmit Shield
Unconnected
Frame Ground on
Transmit Shield
Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive
coax signal.
Insert the NTAK10
Install the circuit card in slots 1-9 in the Option 11C Cabinet, or in slots
11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and fourth IP
expansion cabinets, respectively.
Secure the circuit card in the cabinet or Media Gateway by locking the lock
latch assemblies.
Procedure 39
Connecting the cables
Step Action
1
In the cabling area, located directly below the card cage, remove
the retaining bar that secures the MDF cables. Connect the
NTBK05DA/CA interface cable to the 50-pin Amphenol connector
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DTI software implementation 241
below the card slot holding the NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI circuit card.
Reinstall the retaining bar to secure the cable(s).
2
Terminate the NTBK05DA/CA carrier cable as required.
—End—
NTBK05DA pinouts
The pinouts for the NTBK05DA cable are as follows:
Table 88
NTBK05DA pinouts
Color
Signal
pin 23
pin 48
pin 50
pin 24
pin 49
pin 25
pin 6
pin 7
pin 9
pin 2
pin 3
pin 5
Black
White
Bare
Black
Red
R0
T0
R0/T0 FGND
R1
T1
Bare
R1/T1 FGND
NTBK05CA pinouts
The pinouts for the NTBK05CA cable are as follows:
Table 89
NTBK05CA pinouts
From:
To:
To:
To:
50-pin MDF
connector
Transmit coax
connector
Receive coax
connector
50-pin MDF
connector
—
—
pin 23
pin 48
pin 24
pin 49
pin 21
pin 46
Inner conductor
—
—
outer conductor
—
—
—
—
—
Inner conductor
—
outer conductor
—
—
pin 49
pin 48
DTI software implementation
The following procedure describes the process required to program basic 2.0
Mb DTI on the system main and IP expansion cabinets or Media Gateway.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242 2.0 Mb DTI implementation
Task summary list
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
LD 17 - Adding a 2.0 Mb DTI card
Prompt
REQ
TYPE
...
Response
CHG
Description
Change.
CEQU
Common equipment.
xx
DTI2
Enter a card slot number for 2.0 Mb DTI.
LD 73 - Defining the 2.0 Mb DTI ABCD signaling bit tables
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ
NEW
CHG
Add or change Digital Trunk Interface data block.
TYPE
FEAT
SICA
...
DTI2
ABCD
2-16
2.0 Mb/s DTI data block.
ABCD bit signaling category.
Signaling category.
DFLT
(1)-16
Default signaling category used for default values
JDMI defaults to 16 with <CR>3.
Incoming/Outgoing Calls:
IDLE(S)
IDLE(R)
FALT(S)
abcd
abcd
abcd
N
(Send) idle signal bits.
(Receive) idle signal bits.
(Send) bits. 2.0 Mb DTI out-of-service.
If FALT (send) signal not required.
(Receive) bits. 2.0 Mb DTI out-of-service.
If FALT (receive) signal not required.
FALT(R)
abcd
N
Incoming Calls:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DTI software implementation 243
Prompt
Response
Description
SEZ(R)
abcd
Seize signal (send or receive) for voice or data calls from or
to a non-SL-1.
SEZD(R)
SEZV(R)
abcd
N
Seize signal (send or receive) for data calls between SL-1s.
If SEZD(R) signal not required.
abcd
N
Seize signal (send or receive) for voice calls.
If SEZV(R) signals not required.
P CALL(R)
TIME
abcd
ON OFF
(Receive) signal sent during seize by an incoming CO trunk.
Length of pulse time on, and time off.
(default 2 seconds on, 8 seconds off)
SEZA(S)
abcd
N
Seize signal acknowledgment (send).
If SEZA(S) signal not required.
P WNKS(S) abcd
Wink start (corresponds to a pulsed seize acknowledgment).
Prompted when SEZA(S) not required.
N
If WNKS(S) signal not required.
Time for WNKS(S) signal in milliseconds.
(Receive) decadic pulses.
TIME
10-(220)-630
P DIGT(R)
abcd
N
If DIGT(R) not required.
NRCV(S)
abcd
Number received signal (send).
If NRCV(S) signal not required.
End of selection free (send).
N
P EOSF(S)
abcd
N
If EOSF(S) not required.
TIME
(100)-150
abcd
Time for EOSF(S) in milliseconds.
End of selection busy (send).
P EOSB(S)
N
If EOSB(S) not required.
TIME
(100)-150
abcd
Time for EOSB(S) in milliseconds.
Operator calling time (receive) signal.
If OPCA(R) not required.
P OPCA(R)
N
TIME
64-(128)-192
(1)-5
Time of OPCA(R) pulse in milliseconds.
Number of OPCA(R) pulses.
REPT
CONN(S)
CONN(R)
P RRC(S)
abcd
Connect send.
abcd
Connect receive.
abcd
Register recall (send) signal. Activated by Malicious Call Trace.
If RRC(S) not required.
N
TIME
10-(100)-150
abcd
Time of RRC(S) signal in milliseconds.
Bring up receiver (send). Uses switchhook flash timer for timer.
P BURS(S)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
244 2.0 Mb DTI implementation
Prompt
Response
Description
N
If BURS(S) not required.
P BURS(R)
abcd
Bring up receiver (receive). Uses switchhook flash timer for
timer.
N
If BURS(R) not required.
TIME
64-(128)-192
abcd
Length of BURS(R) pulse in milliseconds.
CAS Flash. Same timing as analogue trunks.
P CAS(S)
Note: Prompted for JDMI only. Operational only if CASM
package equipped.
N
If CAS(S) not required.
CLRB(S)
abcd
N
Clearback (send) signal.
If CLRB(S) not required (IDLE signal is used).
Release control (send) signal.
If RCTL(S) not required.
P RCTL(S)
abcd
N
Note: Prompted only when CLRB is unused or is defined the
same as IDLE.
TIME
100-(150)-300
Time value is stored in multiples of 10 milliseconds.
R RCOD(S) abcd
Release Control Originating party Disconnect. This signal is
another pulsed SL-1 signal sent on incoming trunks when the
originating party disconnects first.
N
If RCOD(S) not required.
150
TIME
Timer value in milliseconds is fixed.
Operator (receive) manual recall signal.
If OPRS(R) not required.
P OPRS(R)
abcd
N
xxx yyy
TIME
Minimum and maximum time range for OPRS(R) in milliseconds.
xxx = 8-(48)-2040
yyy = xxx-(128)-2040
P NXFR(S)
abcd
N
Network transfer signal (send) pulse. Pulse time not variable.
If NXFR(S) not required.
P ESNW(S) abcd
N
ESN wink signal (send) pulse. Pulse time not variable.
If ESNW(S) not required.
P CAS(S)
abcd
Centralized Attendant signal (send) pulse. Pulse time not
variable.
Note: Prompted for 2.0 Mb DTI only.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DTI software implementation 245
Prompt
CLRF(R)
SOSI
Response
Description
N
If CAS(S) not required.
Clear forward (receive).
If CLRF(R) not required.
Special operator signal defined.
abcd
N
abcd
(N)
Undefined. Prompted when OPRC = N.
Outgoing Calls:
SEZA(S)
SEZD(S)
abcd
Seize acknowledgement
abcd
N
Seize acknowledgement and (send) data signal.
If SEZD(S) not required.
SEZV(S)
TIME
abcd
Seize acknowledgement and (send) voice signal. Only
recommended for Meridian to M-1 applications.
xxx yyy
Minimum and maximum time range for OPRS(R) in milliseconds.
xxx = 8-(48)-2040
yyy = xxx-(128)-2040
N
If SEZV(S) not required.
SEZA(R)
abcd
N
Seize acknowledgment (receive) signal.
If SEZA(R) not required.
P WNKS(R) abcd
N
Wink start pulsed seize acknowledgment (receive) signal.
If P WNKS(R) not required.
TIME
20-(140)-500,
20-(290)-500
Minimum and maximum length of WNKS(R) pulse in
milliseconds.
P EOS(R)
abcd
N
End of selection (receive) signal.
If EOS(R) not required.
TIME
(64)-320
Length of EOS(R) pulse stored in multiples of 8 milliseconds.
64-(256)-320
CONN(S)
CONN(R)
P OPRC(R)
abcd
abcd
abcd
Connect send.
Connect receive.
Operator recall signal for special services. minimum three
pulses of 160 milliseconds each.
N
If OPRC(R) not required.
P BURS(S)
P BURS(R)
abcd
N
Bring up receiver (send) for L1 networking.
If BURS(S) not required.
abcd
N
Bring up receiver (receive) for L1 networking.
If BURS(R) not required.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246 2.0 Mb DTI implementation
Prompt
Response
64-(128)-192
N
Description
TIME
Length of BURS(R) pulse in milliseconds.
If SEZV(S) not required.
P CAS(R)
abcd
CAS Flash. Same timing as analogue trunks. Prompted for
JDMI only. Operational only if CASR package equipped.
N
If CAS(R) not required.
CLRB(R)
abcd
N
Clear back.
If CLRB(R) not required, when IDLE is used.
P RCTL(R)
abcd
Release control. Prompted only when CLRB is unused or is
defined the same as IDLE.
N
If RCTL(R) not required.
TIME
96-(128)-320
96-(256)-320
Time value stored in multiples of 8 milliseconds.
P NXFR(R)
abcd
N
Network transfer.
If not required.
P ESNW(R) abcd
N
ESN wink signal.
If ESNW(R) not required.
Centralized attendant service signal.
P CAS(R)
abcd
3
2.0 Mb DTI only .
N
If CAS(R) not required.
Clear forward (send).
If CLRF(S) not required.
800 milliseconds.
CLRF(S)
TIME
abcd
N
(0)
Note: Prompted when the abcd bits entered in response to the
CLFR(S) prompt are different from the abcd bits of the IDLE
signal.
SOSO
abcd (N)
Special operator signal defined (undefined).
Note: Prompted when OPRC = N.
LD 73 - Defining the 2.0 Mb DTI pad tables
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ
NEW
CHG
Add or change Digital Trunk Interface data block.
TYPE
FEAT
DTI2
PAD
2.0 Mb DTI.
Request the digital pad feature.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DTI software implementation 247
Prompt
Response
Description
1-16
PDCA
PAD Category table.
If one channel is using the specified table, then the command
is aborted.
Cannot modify or delete Table 1.
TNLS
DFLT
YES (NO)
(1)-16
TN List. This is for the print command only.
A YES response means that a list of the trunk TNs using the
requested PAD category tables are printed after the table.
For NEW only. The table is used for default values.
The following prompts define the pad levels.
The receiving pad code is r and the transmission pad code is t. These entries have the range 0-15.
The pad values (in decibels) relating to these codes are shown after this table.
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
ONP
OPX
DTT
On-premises extension.
Off-premises extension.
Digital TIE trunks.
SDTT
NTC
TRC
DCO
VNL
Digital Satellite TIE trunks.
Nontransmission compensated.
Transmission compensated.
Digital COT, FEX, WAT, and DID trunks.
Via Net Loss.
DTO
ACO
AFX
2.0 Mb DTI digital TOLL office trunks.
AnalogCO or WATS trunks.
Analog FEX trunks.
ADD
SATT
TNLS
Analog DID trunks.
Analog satellite TIE trunks.
TN List. This is for the print command only.
YES (NO)
A YES response means that a list of the trunk TNs using the
requested PAD category tables are printed after the table.
DFLT
(1)-16
For NEW only. The table is used for default values.
The following prompts define the pad levels.
The receiving pad code is r and the transmission pad code is t. These entries have the range 0-15.
The pad values (in decibels) relating to these codes are shown after this table.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248 2.0 Mb DTI implementation
Prompt
ONP
Response
Description
r
r
t
t
On-premises extension.
Off-premises extension.
TN List. This is for the print command only.
OPX
TNLS
YES (NO)
A YES response means that a list of the trunk TNs using the
requested PAD category tables are printed after the table.
DFLT
(1)-16
For NEW only. The table is used for default values.
The following prompts define the pad levels.
The receiving pad code is r and the transmission pad code is t. These entries have the range 0-15.
The pad values (in decibels) relating to these codes are shown after this table.
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
ONP
OPX
DTT
On-premises extension.
Off-premises extension.
Digital TIE trunks.
SDTT
NTC
TRC
DCO
VNL
Digital Satellite TIE trunks.
Nontransmission compensated.
Transmission compensated.
digital COT, FEX, WAT, and DID trunks.
Via Net Loss.
DTO
ACO
AFX
2.0 Mb DTI digital TOLL office trunks.
Analog CO or WATS trunks.
Analog FEX trunks.
ADD
SATT
ATO
DTI2
Analog DID trunks.
Analog satellite TIE trunks.
Analog TOLL office trunks.
2.0 Mb DTI trunk
(Prompted only if the 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped
and TYPE=DTI2).
r
r
t
t
XUT
XEM
Analog CO trunk
(Prompted only if the 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped
and TYPE=DTI2).
Analog TIE trunk
(Prompted only if the 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped
and TYPE=DTI2).
The following pads are available for the 2.0 Mb DTI card. Their respective
codes are also given. Positive dB represents loss and negative dB
represents gain.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DTI software implementation 249
Table 90
2.0 Mb DTI pads
5
7
code
0
1
2
3
4
6
value (dB)
code
0.0
8
+1.0
9
+2.0
10
+3.0
11
+4.0
12
+5.0
13
+6.0
14
+7.0
15
-1
+8.0
16
-2
+9.0
17
-3
+10.0
18
+11.0
19
+12.0
20
+13.0
21
+14.0
22
value (dB)
code
23
-9
-5
-7
value (dB)
code
-4
-6
-8
24
-10
25
idle
26
+0.6
value (dB)
LD 73 - Defining the 2.0 Mb DTI timers
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ
NEW
CHG
Add or Change Digital Trunk Interface data block
TYPE
FEAT
LOOP
DTI2
LPTI
xx
2.0 Mb DTI
Set the timers used for a 2.0 Mb DTI
2.0 Mb DTI card slot number.
xx = 1-9 in Main Cabinet.
xx = 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 in IP expansion cabinets
1-4, respectively.
xx = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 of the first, second, third and
fourth Media Gateway, respectively.
P DIGT (S)
P METR(R)
abcd
N
Digit pulse timing from TDS (Bits P, X or U are selectable)
If DIGT(S) signal not required
abcd
Metering (receive). Bits P, X or U. Only two P bits allowed.
COT and DID trunks only.
Note: PPM package must be enabled.
If METR(R) signal not required
N
0
EDGE
PPM bit counted when changed from 1 to 0.
1
PPM bit counted when changed from 0 to 1.
Maximum time METR signal is in milliseconds.
TIME
40-(240)-480
0-(1920)-8064
SASU
Seize acknowledge supervision period in milliseconds.
2.0 Mb DTI default = 1920
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250 2.0 Mb DTI implementation
Prompt
Response
Description
MFAO
YES (NO)
<CR>
DTI card will or will not set bit 3 of timeslot 0 if loss of
Multiframe Alignment Signal (MFAS) occurs.
2.0 Mb DTI default = NO
<cr> = no change is required
SZNI
MFF
YES (NO)
CRC
PSTN incoming seizure during lockout of MFAS and far-end
fault states allowed (denied)
Multiframe format - Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC 4)
(AFF)
Alternative Frame Format
Note: Prompted for Small Systems.
The following prompts and associated responses define the grade of service
timers for the DTI card. Group I problems are treated individually. They are
bipolar violations, bit error rate (frame alignment) slips, and CRC-4 errors.
Group II problems are treated as a group. They are bit 3 of TS0 (far-end
out of service), bit 6 of TS16 (far-end lost multiframe alignment), AIS (alarm
indication signal), loss of frame alignment, and loss of multiframe alignment.
Responses are interpreted as follows:
•
•
•
•
mt = Maintenance threshold time.
ct = New call suppression (hardware service removal) threshold time.
ot = Out of service threshold time.
dt = No new data calls suppression threshold time.
Each of the response times are expressed as follows:
•
nnnY = time in milliseconds where nnnn = 20-5000 (input to nearest
20 milliseconds.)
•
•
•
nnnS = time in seconds where nnn = 1-240
nnnM = time in minutes where nnn = 1-240
nnH = time in hours where nn = 1-24
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DTI software implementation 251
LD 73 - Defining the grade of service timers for the DTI card
Prompt
Response
Description
CRC
NC mt dt ct ot
Cyclic redundancy check error counts.
NC = Error count values are in the range 1-255.
mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT).
dt = No new data calls threshold time (NNDC).
ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC).
ot = Out of service threshold time (OOS).
Note: The following requirements must be met for input.
mt = Maintenance threshold is equal to or greater than dt.
dt = Data calls threshold is equal to or greater than ct.
ct = Calls threshold is equal to or greater than ot.
BPV
FAP
SLP
NB mt dt ct ot
NF mt dt ct ot
NS mt dt ct ot
Bipolar violation error counts.
NB = Error count values are in the range 1-255.
mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT).
dt = No new data calls threshold time (NNDC).
ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC).
ot = Out of service threshold time (OOS).
Note: The following requirements must be met for this input: mt
= >dt = >ct = >ot.
Frame alignment problem thresholds.
NF = Error count values are in the range 1-255.
mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT).
dt = No new data calls threshold time (NNDC).
ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC).
ot = Out of service threshold time
Note: The following requirements must be met for this input: mt
= >dt = >ct = >ot.
Maintenance threshold slip count.
NS = Error count values are in the range 1-255.
mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT).
dt = No new data calls threshold time (NNDC).
ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC).
ot = Out of service threshold time (OOS).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252 2.0 Mb DTI implementation
Prompt
Response
Description
GP2
T2 mt dt ct ot
Group 2 error thresholds.
This is the maximum amount of time that can occur before
software checks the associated thresholds of 120 to 32640
msec and rounds it to the closest multiple of 128 msec. T2 error
count values are in the range 1-(20)-255. NC = Error count
values are in the range 1-255.
mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT).
dt = No new data calls threshold time (NNDC).
ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC).
ot = Out of service threshold time (OOS).
Note: The following requirements must be met for this input: mt
= >dt = >ct = >ot.
FRFW
YES (NO)
This 2.0 Mb DTI card is (is not) equipped with special Firmware
for France.
LD 73 - Defining the 2.0 Mb DTI system timers
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ
NEW
CHG
Add or Change Digital Trunk Interface data block.
TYPE
FEAT
DTI2
SYTI
2.0 Mb DTI.
Change the switch timers and counters for 2.0 Mb DTI.
There is only one such block per switch.
MAND
NCSD
0-(15)-1440
Maintenance guard time in minutes.
0-(15)-1440
1S-59S
New call suppression guard time in minutes and seconds.
OSGD
OOSC
PERS
DBNC
CCO
0-(15)-1440
0-(5)-127
0-(100)-254
(10)-32
xx
Out-of-service guard time in minutes.
Out-of-service occurrences since midnight (DTI disabled).
Persistence timer in milliseconds for far-end problems.
Debounce timer in milliseconds.
Card slot number for Clock Controller 0.
No change for defaults.
<CR>
X
To remove clock controller data.
xx
PREF CCO
SREF CCO
CC1
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet
xx
xx
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet
Card number for Clock Controller 1.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DTI software implementation 253
Prompt
Response
Description
xx
xx
xx
xx
PREF CC1
SREF CC1
CC2
Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one.
Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one.
Card number for Clock Controller 2.
PREF CC2
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.
xx
SREF CC2
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.
xx
xx
CC3
Card number for Clock Controller 3.
PREF CC3
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.
xx
SREF CC3
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.
xx
xx
CC4
Card number for Clock Controller 4.
PREF CC4
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.
CCGD
CCAR
0-(15)-1440
0-(15)
Clock controller free run guard time in minutes.
Clock controller audit rate. The time, in minutes, between normal
CC audits. Only programmable on units equipped with 2-Mb DTI.
Note 1: The clock controller prompts only appear for clocks
which are valid for the machine type being configured. The
prompts only appear if the system is in a valid state for the
definition of the 2.0 Mb DTI clock controller data that is, the DTI
clock references must be unused or in a free-run mode.
Note 2: Before programming clock controller references, the
QPC775 clock controller card(s) must be plugged in, and the
switches on the system’s QPC441 3 Port Extender must be
appropriately set. Otherwise, the PREF and SREF prompts are
not given.
LD 16 - Configuring the service routes
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ
NEW
CHG
Add or Change Route data block.
TYPE
CUST
RDB
xx
Route data block.
Customer number, as defined in LD 15
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254 2.0 Mb DTI implementation
Prompt
Response
Description
ROUT
Route number
0-511
0-127
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway 1000B.
Service routes allowed with ISDN.
TKTP
TIE
TIE trunk route.
COT
DID
Central office trunk.
Direct Inward Dial trunk.
RCLS
DTRK
(EXT)
INT
Class marked route as Internal or External.
Digital trunk route.
Analog.
Digital.
(NO)
YES
DGTP
...
DTI2
Select a digital trunk type of 2.0 Mb DTI.
NCNA
NCRD
YES (NO)
YES (NO)
Network Call Name is (is not) allowed.
Network Call Redirection. Allows network call redirection
messages to be sent (or blocks messages if NCRD=no).
PTYP
Port type at far-end:
(ATT)
AST
Analog TIE trunk routes:
Analog TIE trunk.
Analogue satellite system TIE trunk or ESN satellite
Meridian SL-1 TIE trunk.
Analogue TIE trunk, used instead of ATT whenever the system
has one or more digital satellite trunk routes (DST) to any digital
satellite system which includes OPX sets.
AOT
DTT
DCT
DST
Digital TIE trunk routes:
Digital TIE trunk.
Combination digital TIE trunk.
Digital satellite system TIE trunk.
AUTO
ICOG
YES (NO)
Auto-terminate must be NO if response to DSEL is VOD.
IAO
ICT
Incoming and outgoing trunk.
Incoming trunk.
OGT
Outgoing trunk.
SRCH
(LIN)
RRB
Linear search, or round-robin search, used for outgoing trunks.
xxxx
ACOD
TARG
OABS
INST
Trunk route access code.
1-15
Trunk access restriction group for routes.
Outgoing digit(s) to be absorbed.
Digits to be inserted.
0-9
(0)-999
(NO) YES
CNTL
Changes to controls or timers.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DTI software implementation 255
Prompt
Response
Description
NEDC
Near-end disconnect control.
Either end control.
ETH
ORG
Originating end control. Default for TIE, ATVN, DID, and CCSA
trunk types.
FEDC
Far-end disconnect control.
ETH
Either end.
FEC
Far-end.
JNT
Joint.
(ORG)
YES (NO)
(30)-240
Originating end.
DLTN
Dial tone on originating calls.
TIMER
Network Ring Again duration timer time is in minutes.
Note: Package 148, Advanced ISDN Features, is required.
LD 14 - Defining the associated list of service trunks
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ
NEW
CHG
Add or Change Trunk data block.
TYPE
TIE
TIE trunk route.
COT
DID
Central Office trunk data block.
Direct Inward Dial trunk data block.
1-382
l ch
CHID
TN
Channel ID for this trunk.
Loop and channel for digital trunks
New card slot and channel, where:
s c
TOTN
•
s = 1-9 DTI2 card slot number (Option 11C main cabinet)
s = 11-19 DTI2 card slot number (IP expansion cabinet 1)
s = 21-29 DTI2 card slot number (IP expansion cabinet 2)
s = 31-39 DTI2 card slot number (IP expansion cabinet 3)
s = 41-49 DTI2 card slot number (IP expansion cabinet 4)
•
c = 1-30, 2.0 Mb DTI channel
PDCA
(1) - 16
Pad Category Number. This prompt is given if the card is a 2.0
Mb DTI card, or if the card is a 2.0 Mb DTI card and the 1.5/2.0
Mb Gateway feature is equipped. For 2 to 16, the pad category
used must already be defined in LD 73.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256 2.0 Mb DTI implementation
Prompt
Response
Description
PCML
(MU) A
System PCM law.
Prompted if the card is 2.0 Mb DTI, or if the card is a 2.0 Mb
DTI card and the 2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped. MU, the
default, was entered in the PCML prompt in LD 17.
xx
CUST
NCOS
Customer number, as defined LD 15
0-3
Network class-of-service group number:
0-7
CDP
0-15
BARS/NFCR
NARS
RTMB
Route number and Member number
0-511 1-4000
0-127 1-4000
xxxx
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway 1000B.
Night-service directory number.
NITE
TGAR
CLS
(0)-15
Trunk group access restriction.
Class-of-service restrictions.
Note: If DIP option is selected, a new SLCA table must be
defined in LD 73.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
257
2.0 Mb PRI implementation
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview
This chapter provides the information required to install 2.0 Mb PRI on a
system. It includes information about hardware installation and software
implementation.
Hardware requirements
Circuit cards
To implement 2.0 Mb PRI, an NTAK79 or an NTBK50 PRI card plus
associated daughterboards is required.
Table 91
2.0 Mb PRI hardware requirement
Description
Circuit card
NTBK50
2.0 Mb PRI circuit card.
Supports the NTAK20 clock controller
daughterboard and a D-channel handler
interface daughterboard (NTAK93 DCHI or
NTBK51 DDCH).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
Description
Circuit card
NTAK79
2.0 Mb PRI circuit card.
Supports an onboard clock controller and an
onboard D-channel handler interface.
NTAK20
Clock-controller daughterboard. The system
supports only one active clock controller per
system or IP expansion cabinet.
Note: Every cabinet or Media Gateway that
contains a digital trunk must contain a clock
controller.
Connects to the NTBK50 PRI card.
NTAK93
NTBK51
D-channel-handler interface (DCHI)
daughterboard.
Connects to the NTBK50 PRI card.
Downloadable D-channel daughterboard
(DDCH).
Connects to the NTBK50 PRI card.
Cables
One of the following cables is required for a PRI connection:
•
•
CEPT Cable - NTBK05DA (120 1/2 twisted pair—6.15 m length), or
CEPT Cable - NTBK05CA (75 1/2 Ensure the document title is correct. m
length)
Hardware description
2.0 Mb PRI cards
Two PRI cards are available on the system:
•
•
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card
The difference between the two PRI cards is that the NTBK50, when
equipped with the NTBK51 D-channel daughterboard, can download
software onto the card. This feature is based on the MSDL platform and
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hardware description 259
essentially replaces the D-channel circuit on the NTAK79 PRI card. (The
NTAK79 PRI card does not support the NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel
handler daughterboard.)
A second difference between the NTAK79 and NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI cards
is that the NTAK79 has an onboard clock controller while the NTBK50
supports the NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard.
Note: If the NTAK93 D-channel daughterboard is attached to the
NTBK50 PRI card instead of the NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel
daughterboard, the NTBK50 PRI card functions in the same manner
as the NTAK79 PRI card.
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card
The 2.0 Mb Primary Rate Interface card provides the physical interface for
the digital E-1 carrier on the system. The card includes an onboard clock
controller and onboard D-channel handler. It is installed in slots 1-9 in the
main cabinet. On IP Expansion cabinets, it is installed in slots 11-19, 21-29,
31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and fourth expansion cabinets,
respectively.
For information on the NTAK79 faceplate LEDs, refer to ISDN Primary Rate
Interface Maintenance (NN43001-717).
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card
The 2.0 Mb Primary Rate Interface card provides the physical interface for
the digital E-1 carrier on the system. The card is installed in slots 1-9 in the
main cabinet or Media Gateway. On IP Expansion cabinets, it is installed
in slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and fourth
expansion cabinets, respectively.
ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller set to
an external reference clock.
Note: Clocking slips can occur between Media Gateway systems that
are clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The
slips can degrade voice quality.
The NTBK50 supports the following clock controller and D-channel handler
daughterboards:
•
•
NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard
NTAK93 D-channel handler daughterboard, or NTBK51 Downloadable
D-channel daughterboard.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
260 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
If the NTAK93 D-channel daughterboard is attached, the NTBK50 PRI card
functions in the same manner as the NTAK79 PRI card. If the NTBK51
D-channel daughterboard is attached, software is downloaded to the card
instead of residing in a D-channel circuit.
For information on the NTBK50 faceplate LEDs, refer to ISDN Primary Rate
Interface Maintenance (NN43001-717).
NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard
The NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard is used with the NTBK50 2.0
Mb PRI card. The NTAK79 PRI card has an onboard clock controller.
Digital Trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock
source results in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all
parts of the network. On systems, synchronization is accomplished with the
NTAK20 clock controller circuit card.
ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Every Small System cabinet or Media Gateway that contains a digital trunk must
contain a clock controller. If a Small System is equipped with digital trunks, Nortel
recommends that at least one digital trunk is placed in the Small System main
cabinet.
The Clock Controller circuitry synchronizes the system to an external
reference clock, and generates and distributes the clock to the system. The
system can function either as a slave to an external clock or as a clocking
master. The NTAK20AB version of the clock controller meets AT&T Stratum
3 and Bell Canada Node Category D specifications. The NTAK20BB version
meets CCITT stratum 4 specifications.
Shelf slot assignment
On non-CISPR B system cabinets, the NTAK20 is placed in slots 1-9. On
cabinets NTAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx, the active NTAK20 is placed in slots
1-3 (slots 4-10 cannot be used.) On IP Expansion cabinets, the NTAK20
is placed in slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and
fourth expansion cabinets, respectively.
NTAK93 D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI) daughterboard
The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard interfaces with the system Central
Processing Unit (CPU) and mounts on the NTBK50 PRI card for PRI (but not
ISL) applications. The equivalent circuit resides onboard the NTAK79 2.0 Mb
PRI card. The DTI/PRI digital trunk card is installed in the Media Gateway.
Digital trunk cards are not supported in Media Gateway Expansions.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install the NTAK79 PRI card 261
The DCHI is responsible for performing the Q.921 layer 2 protocol
information. It transfers layer 3 signaling information between two adjacent
network switches.
The NTAK93 DCH daughterboard, when installed on the NTBK50 circuit
card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTBK50.
A minimum of one NTAK93 is required for each PRI link. If more than one
PRI link connects to the same end location, a single DCHI circuit card can
support up to a maximum of sixteen PRI connections for the system. This
allows for the support of 495 B-Channels or PRI trunks.
NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel (DDCH) daughterboard
The NTBK51 DDCH daughterboard interfaces with the system Central
Processing Unit (CPU) and mounts on the NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card
for PRI D-Channel applications.
Digital trunk cards are not supported in Media Gateway Expansions.
The DDCH is equivalent to the MSDL card on larger systems, but it only
supports D-channel applications (no SDI or ESDI).
The NTBK51 DDCH daughterboard, when installed on the NTBK50 circuit
card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTBK50.
A minimum of one NTBK51 is required for each PRI link. If more than one
PRI link connects to the same end location, a single DDCH circuit card
can support up to a maximum of 16 PRI connections for the system. This
enables support for 495 B-channels or PRI trunks.
Install the NTAK79 PRI card
The steps required to install PRI are as follows:
Step Action
1
2
3
Inspect the PRI card.
Set the switches on the PRI card.
Insert the PRI card in slots 1-9 of the Small System main cabinet,
or in slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and
fourth Expansion cabinets, respectively.
4
Connect the cables.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
Each step is described in the pages that follow. The PRI hardware
installation procedure is the same regardless of the type of system at the
far-end that is, another system such as the AXE-10, or SYS-12.
Inspect the NTAK79 circuit card
•
Locate the NTAK79 2.0 Mb circuit card and carefully remove it from its
packaging.
•
Inspect the circuit card for any visible damage that occurred during
shipping.
Set the switches on the NTAK79
The NTAK79 incorporates four onboard dip switches. The tables that follow
provide information on the various settings and related functions of these
switches.
Note: The ON position for all the switches is positioned toward the
bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board
adjacent to the bottom left corner of each individual switch.
Figure 83
NTAK79 with switch locations
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install the NTAK79 PRI card 263
Set the switches on the circuit card according to the requirements of your
specific installation:
Switch SW1 - DCHI configuration
This switch enables and disables the onboard DCHI and sets the operating
mode of the DCHI.
For the U.K., use DPNSS1 mode. For all other countries, use Q.931 mode.
Table 92
Switch SW1
Switch
SW 1-1
SW 1-2
Down (On)
Up (Off)
enable DCHI
DPNSS1/DASS2
disable DCHI
Q.931
Switch SW2 - Carrier impedance configuration
This switch sets the carrier impedance to either 1201/2 or 751/2. Twisted pair
cable is usually associated with 1201/2. Coaxial cable is usually associated
with the 751/2 setting.
Table 93
Switch SW2
Cable Type
751/2
SW 2-1
SW 2-2
Up (Off)
Down (On)
Down (On)
Up (Off)
1201/2
Switch SW3 - Clock controller configuration
This switch enables and hardware disables the onboard Clock Controller.
SW 3-2 should be disabled if the onboard clock controller is not in use.
Table 94
Switch SW3
Note
Switch
SW 3-1
SW 3-2
Down (On)
—
Up (Off)
—
Spare
Disabled
Enabled
Switch SW4 - Carrier shield grounding
This switch allows for the selective grounding of the Tx/Rx pairs of the
carrier cable. Closing the switch (down position) applies Frame Ground
(FGND) to the coaxial carrier cable shield, creating a 751/2 unbalanced
configuration. This applies only to the NTBK05CA cable.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
264 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
Table 95
Switch SW4
Switch
SW 4-1
SW 4-2
Down (On)
Rx—FGND
Tx—FGND
Up (Off)
Rx—OPEN
Tx—OPEN
Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive
coax signal.
Insert the NTAK79
Slide the circuit card into card slot 1-9 in the Small System main cabinet, or
in slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and fourth IP
Expansion cabinets, respectively.
Secure the circuit card in the cabinet by locking the lock latch assemblies.
The card number associated with a 2.0 Mb PRI card is based on the slot in
which the card is installed.
Follow the instructions below to connect cables to the NTAK79 PRI card.
Procedure 40
Connecting the cables
Step Action
1
In the cabling area, located directly below the card cage, remove
the retaining bar that secures the MDF cables. Connect the
NTBK05DA/CA interface cable to the 50-pin Amphenol connector
below the slot in which the NTAK79 is installed. reinstall the retaining
bar to secure the cable(s) in place.
2
Terminate the NTBK05DA/CA carrier cable as required.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install the NTAK79 PRI card 265
Figure 84
NTAK79 cabling
NTBK05DA pinouts
The pinouts for the NTBK05DA cable are as follows:
Table 96
NTBK05DA pinouts
From:
To:
50-pin MDF
connector
9-pin
connector
color
Black
White
Bare
Black
Red
Signal
pin 23
pin 48
pin 50
pin 24
pin 49
pin 25
pin 6
pin 7
pin 9
pin 2
pin 3
pin 5
R0
T0
R0/T0 FGND
R1
T1
Bare
R1/T1 FGND
NTBK05CA pinouts
The pinouts for the NTBK05CA cable are as follows:
Table 97
NTBK05CA pinouts
From:
To:
To:
To:
50-pin MDF
connector
Transmit coax
connector
Receive coax
connector
50-pin MDF
connector
—
—
—
pin 23
pin 48
Inner conductor
outer conductor
—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
From:
To:
To:
To:
50-pin MDF
connector
Transmit coax
connector
Receive coax
connector
50-pin MDF
connector
—
—
—
—
—
pin 24
pin 49
pin 21
pin 46
Inner conductor
—
outer conductor
—
—
pin 49
pin 48
Install the NTBK50 PRI card
The NTBK50 serves as a motherboard to the NTAK20 clock controller,
and either the NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel handler or the NTAK93
D-channel handler.
The steps required to install PRI are as follows:
Step Action
1
2
3
4
Inspect the PRI card and daughterboards.
Set the switches on the PRI card.
Mount the daughterboard(s) on the PRI card.
Insert the PRI card in the Small System main cabinet or Media
Gateway and any IP expansion cabinets.
5
Connect the cables.
—End—
Each step is described in the pages that follow. The PRI hardware
installation procedure is the same regardless of the type of system at the
far-end.
Procedure 41
Inspecting the NTBK50 circuit card
Step Action
1
2
Locate the NTBK50 2.0 Mb circuit card plus associated
daughterboard(s) and carefully remove them from their packaging.
Inspect the circuit cards for any visible damage that occurred during
shipping.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install the NTBK50 PRI card 267
Set the switches on the NTBK50
The NTBK50 incorporates three onboard dip switches. The following tables
provide information on the various settings and related functions of these
switches.
Note: The ON position for all the switches is positioned toward the
bottom of the card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board
adjacent to the bottom left corner of each switch.
Figure 85
NTBK50 with switch locations
Set the switches on the circuit card according to the requirements of your
installation.
Switch SW1 - DCHI configuration (NTAK93 only)
This switch enables and disables the DCHI and sets the operating mode of
the DCHI. It is only used if an NTAK93 D-channel handler daughterboard is
being used. It has no effect when using the NTBK51 DDCH daughterboard.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
For the U.K., use DPNSS1 mode. For all other countries, use Q.931 mode.
Table 98
Switch SW1
Switch
SW 1-1
SW 1-2
Down (On)
—
Up (Off)
—
DPNSS1/DASS2
Q.931
Switch SW2 - Carrier impedance configuration
This switch sets the carrier impedance to either 1201/2 or 751/2. Twisted pair
cable is usually associated with 1201/2. Coaxial cable is usually associated
with the 751/2 setting.
Table 99
Switch SW2
Cable type
753/4
SW 2-1
Down (On)
Up (Off)
1203/4
Switch SW4 - Carrier shield grounding
This switch supports the selective grounding of Tx and Rx pairs of carrier
cable. Closing the switch (down position) applies Frame Ground (FGND) to
the coaxial carrier cable shield, creating a 751/2 unbalanced configuration.
This applies only to the NTBK05CA cable.
Table 100
Switch SW3
Switch
SW 4-1
SW 4-2
Down (On)
Rx—FGND
Tx—FGND
Up (Off)
Rx—OPEN
Tx—OPEN
Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive
coax signal.
Mount the daughterboards on the NTBK50
Use the following procedure to mount and remove the NTAK20 CC and the
NTBK51 DDCH or NTAK93 DCHI daughterboards onto the NTBK50 PRI.
Install the NTAK93 or NTBK51 daughterboard before the NTAK20
daughterboard. Work on a flat surface when mounting or removing
daughterboards.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install the NTBK50 PRI card 269
Step Action
1
Visually inspect the connector pins on the underside of the
daughterboard. Realign any bent pins prior to mounting.
2
3
Place the NTBK50 down flat on an antistatic pad.
From an overhead view, with the daughterboard parallel above
the NTBK50 and the connector pins aligned over the connector
sockets, align the mounting holes on the daughterboard with the
tops of the standoffs on the NTBK50 (see Figure 86 "Daughterboard
4
5
Slowly lower the daughterboard toward the NTBK50, keeping the
standoffs in line with all four holes, until the holes rest atop the four
standoffs.
If more than slight pressure is required at this point, the connector
pins might not be aligned with the connector socket. If so, lift the
daughterboard off the NTBK50 and return to step 2.
Gently apply pressure along the edge of the board where the
connector is located until the standoffs at the two corners adjacent
to the connector snap into a locked position. Then press down on
the two corners on the opposite side until they lock into place.
—End—
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
Figure 86
Daughterboard installation
Remove the daughterboards from the NTBK50
Use these guidelines to remove the NTAK20 and NTBK51 or NTAK93
from the NTBK50 PRI card. Because of the physical layout of the mother
and daughterboards, the NTAK20 should be removed before the NTAK93
or NTBK51.
1. Starting at the two corners opposite the connector, gently lift each
corner out of the locking groove of the standoff.
2. At the two corners adjacent to the connector, gently lift the entire side
until the mounting holes are clear of the locking groove of the standoff.
3. To remove the connector pins, grasp the edge of the board adjacent to
the connector and lift gently.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Install the NTBK50 PRI card 271
If more than one NTBK50 card is installed, the additional cards may not
carry daughterboards, depending on system configuration. At least one
NTAK20 (per system) is always required.
Insert the NTBK50
Slide the circuit card into card slot 1-9 in the Small System main cabinet,
or in slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, 41-49 of the first, second, third, and fourth
IP expansion cabinets, respectively.
Secure the circuit card in the cabinet by locking the lock latch assemblies.
The card number associated with a 2.0 Mb PRI card is based on the slot in
which the card is installed.
Connect the cables
Follow the instructions below to connect cables to the NTBK50 PRI card.
•
In the cabling area, located directly below the card cage, remove the
retaining bar that secures the MDF cables. Connect the NTBK05DA/CA
interface cable to the 50-pin Amphenol connector below the slot in
which the NTBK50 is installed. reinstall the retaining bar to secure the
cable(s) in place.
•
Terminate the NTBK05DA/CA carrier cable as required.
Figure 87
NTBK50 cabling
NTBK05DA pinouts
The pinouts for the NTBK05DA cable are as follows:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
Table 101
NTBK05DA pinouts
From:
50-pin MDF
connector
To:
9-pin connector
color
Black
White
Bare
Black
Red
Signal
pin 23
pin 48
pin 50
pin 24
pin 49
pin 25
pin 6
pin 7
pin 9
pin 2
pin 3
pin 5
R0
T0
R0/T0 FGND
R1
T1
Bare
R1/T1 FGND
NTBK05CA pinouts
The pinouts for the NTBK05CA cable are as follows:
Table 102
NTBK05CA pinouts
From:
To:
To:
To:
50-pin MDF
connector
Transmit coax
connector
Receive coax
connector
50-pin MDF
connector
—
—
pin 23
pin 48
pin 24
pin 49
pin 21
pin 46
Inner conductor
—
—
outer conductor
—
—
—
—
—
Inner conductor
—
outer conductor
—
—
pin 49
pin 48
PRI software implementation
The following information describes the process required to program basic
2.0 Mb PRI on the system.
PRI cards must be configured before defining the DCH links or PRI
applications.
Prompts which do not show a response are left as default. For more
information on any of these prompts, refer to Software Input Output
Administration (NN43001-611).
Task summary
Note: Before installing PRI cards in IP expansion cabinets or Media
Gateway systems, configure them for IP connectivity. Refer to LD 117
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRI software implementation 273
in the Software Input Output Reference — Maintenance for further
information.
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:
LD 17 - Adding a PRI card
Prompt
REQ
Response
CHG
CFN
Description
Change data.
TYPE
CEQU
PRI2
Configuration data block.
Changes to common equipment.
YES
xx
The PRI2 digital card number, where: xx = 1-9 (Option 11C main
cabinet), 11-19 (IP expansion cabinet 1), 21-29 (IP expansion
cabinet 2), 31-39 (IP expansion cabinet 3), 41-49 (IP expansion
cabinet 4.)
xx = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 of the first, second, third and
fourth Media Gateway, respectively.
LD 17 - Adding a DCHI or DDCH
Prompt
REQ
Response
CHG
Description
Change data.
TYPE
CFN
Configuration data block.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
Prompt
Response
Description
ADAN
NEW DCH xx
CHG DCH xx
OUT DCH xx
Add a primary D-channel (any unused SDI port.)
Change a primary D-channel.
Out the primary D-channel, where:
xx = 1-9 for Option 11C main cabinet, 11-19 for IP expansion
cabinet 1, 21-29 for IP expansion cabinet 2, 31-39 for IP
expansion cabinet 3, and 41-49 for IP expansion cabinet 4.
xx = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 of the first, second, third and
fourth Media Gateway, respectively.
CTYP
MSDL
TMDI
Card type where:
MSDL = The NTBK51BA Downloadable D-Channel
Daughterboard.
TMDI = TMDI (NTRB21) card.
1-50
CDNO
Card slot number used as the primary DDCH/DCHI.
Card slots 10, 20, 30, 40, and 50 are only applicable for
D-channel configuration of ISL or VNS.
1
PORT
USR
PORT set to "1".
PRI
D-channel is for ISDN PRI only.
Note: 2.0 Mb only supports PRI or SHA user mode.
xx
xx
IFC
Interface type.
DCHL
PRI card number carries the D-channel. Must match entry made
for the "CDNO" associated with the "DCHI" prompt above.
Where: xx = 1-9 for Option 11C main cabinet, 11-19 for IP
expansion cabinet 1, 21-29 for IP expansion cabinet 2, 31-39 for
IP expansion cabinet 3, and 41-49 for IP expansion cabinet 4.
xx = 11-14, 21-24, 31-34, 41-44 of the first, second, third and
fourth Media Gateway, respectively.
PRI2
OTBF
SIDE
<CR>
Additional PRI Loops controlled by this DCHI. Remember
one DCHI can control up to 16 PRI loops going to the same
destination. For the system, the maximum limit is eight loops.
1-(16)-127
NET (USR)
Number of output request buffers. Note: for a single PRI link,
leave this prompt at default (16). Add 5 output request buffers
per additional link.
Prompted only if IFC is set to SL1. NET = network, the
controlling switch USR = slave to the controller
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRI software implementation 275
Prompt
Response
Description
RLS
XX
Software release of far-end. This is the current software release
of the far-end. If the far-end has an incompatible release of
software, it prevents the sending of application messages, for
example, ’Network Ring Again.
RCAP
OVLR
MSL
MSDL RCAP capability.
<CR>
Allow or disallow overlap receiving on a D-channel. Default is
NO.
LAPD
YES (NO)
Change LAPD parameters. Enter carriage return if timers are
left at default. The following timers are prompted only if LAPD is
set to YES. They are all left at default during initial setup.
- T23
T200
1-(20)-31
2-(3)-40
Interface guard timer checks how long the interface takes to
respond. In units of 0.5 seconds (default 20 = 10 seconds).
Retransmission timer in units of 0.5 seconds (default 3 = 1.5
seconds).
- N200
- N201
- K
1-(3)-8
4(260)
1-(7)-32
Maximum number of retransmissions.
Maximum number of octets in information field.
Maximum number of outstanding unacknowledged frames
(NAKS).
LD 15 - Defining a PRI customer
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ:
NEW
CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE:
CUST
NET
0-99
Networking data.
Customer number
Range for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and
Media Gateway 1000E
0-31
Range for Small System, Media Gateway 1000B
Enter the customer’s Listed Directory Number.
LDN
AC2
XXXX
Access Code 2. Enter call types (type of number) that use
access code 2. Multiple responses are permitted. This prompt
only appears on NARS equipped systems. If a call type is not
entered here, it automatically defaults to access code 1.
NPA
NXX
INTL
SPN
LOC
YES
E.164 National.
E.164 Subscriber.
International.
Special Number.
Location Code.
ISDN
Customer is equipped with ISDN.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
Prompt
Response
Description
1-32700
PNI
Customer private network identifier. This number is unique to
this customer in the private network. For example, it is used as
part of the setup message for feature operation such as Network
Ring Again and Network ACD. Note that if PNI is set to zero (0),
NRAG and NACD does not work.
HNPA
HNXX
NPA
NXX
Telephone area code for this system. Sent in the setup message
as calling line identification.
Telephone local exchange code for this system. Sent in the
setup message as calling line identification.
HLOC
LSC
XXX
Home location code (NARS)
1-9999
One to four digit Local Steering Code established in the
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP). The LSC prompt is required for
Calling Line ID and Network ACD.
LD 16 - Defining a PRI service route
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ
NEW CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE
TKTP
DTRK
DGPT
ISDN
MODE
PNI
RDB
xxx
Route data block.
Trunk type.
YES
PRI2
YES
PRI
Digital trunk route.
2.0 Mb PRI. Prompted only if PRA = YES in LD15.
ISDN option.
Route used for PRI only.
1-32700
Customer private network identifier. Is the same as the CDB
PNI at far-end.
xx
IFC
Interface type.
CHTY
BCH
Signaling type. Prompted if DTRK is YES. D-channel signaling
for B-channels.
aaa
<CR>
CTYP
INAC
Call Type. Enter the call type to associate with the outgoing
route for direct dialing using the trunk access code (instead of
NARS access code).
YES
Insert Access Code. Permits the NARS AC1 or AC2 access
code to be reinserted automatically on an incoming ESN call.
This prompt only appears on a TIE route and is set to "YES" for
features such as Network ACD to function.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRI software implementation 277
Prompt
Response
Description
On an existing ESN network, setting this prompt to "YES"
may also require modifying the Digit Manipulation Index (DMI)
associated with this route at the far-end (so the Access Code is
not reinserted twice). The INSERT prompt (INST) is bypassed if
INAC = YES.
LD 14 - Defining service channels and PRI trunks
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ
NEW
CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
Note: When assigning several members at once use the multiple
create command NEW XX.
TYPE
TN
TIE
l ch
TIE trunk only, allowed between MSL-1.
Loop and channel for digital trunks
RTMB
Route number and Member number
0-511 1-4000
0-127 1-4000
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway 1000B,
...
LD 73 - Defining system timers and clock controller parameters
Prompt
REQ
Response
CHG
PRI2
SYTI
xx
Description
Change data.
TYPE
2.0 Mb PRI.
FEAT
System timers.
CCO
Card slot number for Clock Controller 0.
xx
PREF CCO
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet
xx
SREF CCO
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC containing the primary clock
reference for the main cabinet
xx
xx
xx
xx
xx
CC1
Card number for Clock Controller 1.
PREF CC1
SREF CC1
CC2
Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one.
Primary Reference DTI/PRI loop for Clock controller one.
Card number for Clock Controller 2.
PREF CC2
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.
xx
xx
SREF CC2
CC3
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.
Card number for Clock Controller 3.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
Prompt
Response
Description
xx
PREF CC3
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.
xx
SREF CC3
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.
xx
xx
CC4
Card number for Clock Controller 4.
PREF CC4
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.
xx
SREF CC4
CCAR
Card number of PRI/DTI/SILC or DTI2/PRI2/SILC containing the
primary clock reference.
0-(15)
Clock Controller Audit Rate. Enter the time (in minutes) between
normal CC audits.
LD 73 - Defining PRI parameters and thresholds
Prompt
REQ
Response
CHG
Description
Change data.
TYPE
FEAT
LOOP
MFF
PRI2
2.0 Mb PRI.
LPTI
Loop timers.
X
X is the slot number of the 2.0 Mb PRI card.
Alternate mode or CRC multiframe mode.
Default or alternate alarms selected.
AFF (CRC)
(REG) ALT
ALRM
G10S
SLP
mc mt oc ot
Slip error count.
where
mc = Maintenance threshold slip count, 1- (5)-255.
mt = Maintenance threshold time, default 24 hours.
oc = Out-of-service threshold slip count, 1-(30)-255.
ot = Out-of-service threshold time, default 1 hour.
n1 n2
BPV
Bipolar violation error count. Range is 1-(128)-255 for n1,
1-(122)-255 for n2.
where
n1 is multiplied by 16 to obtain the actual count, giving an
actual count range of 16-4080.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRI software implementation 279
Prompt
Response
Description
n1 n2
CRC
Cyclic redundancy check error count. Range is 1-(201)-255 for
n1, 1-(97)-255 for n2.
where
n1 is multiplied by 4 to obtain the actual count, giving an
actual count range of 4-1020.
n1 n2
FAP
Frame alignment problem error count. Range is 1-(28)-255 for
n1, (1)-255 for n2.
RATS
GP2
1-(10)-15
T2 mt dt ct ot
Number of seconds firmware has to check BPV/CRC/FAP for
excessive error rate.
Group 2 error thresholds.
This is the maximum amount of time that can elapse before
software checks the associated thresholds of 120 to 32,640
msec and rounds it to the closest multiple of 128 msec.
where
T2 = Error count values are in the range 1-(20)-255.
mt = Maintenance threshold time (MNT)(default =100S).
dt = No new data calls threshold time (NNDC)(default =12S).
ct = No new calls threshold time (NNC)(default =12S).
ot = Out of service threshold time (OOS)(default =4S).
Note 1: The following requirements must be met for input mt
= >dt = >ct = >ot.
Note 2: Threshold times are one of the following: nnnnT, nnnS,
nnnM, or nnH, where nnnn is and integer and T,S,M, or H show
the increments of use. The values are as follows:
-nnnnT is the time in 20 millisecond increments (nnnn = 20-5000)
- nnnS is the time in 1 second increments (nnn= 1-240)
- nnnM is the time in 1 minute increments (nnn= 1-240)
-nnH is the time in 1 hour increments (nn= 1-24)
MNG1
NCG1
OSG1
MNG2
NCG2
OSG2
nnnM
nnnM
nnnM
nnnS
nnnS
nnnS
Maintenance Guard time Group 1, default = 15M.
No New Calls Guard time Group 1, default = 15M.
Out Of Service Guard time Group 1, default = 15M.
Maintenance Guard time Group 2, default = 15S.
No New Calls Guard time Group 2, default = 15S.
Out Of Service Guard time Group 2, default = 15S.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
Prompt
Response
Description
ttt
PERS
Persistence Timer for Group II problems.
Enter 0-256 msec in increments of 2 msec. Default is 50
(=100ms).
ttt
CLRS
Clearance Timer for Group II problems. Enter 0 - 256 msec in
increments of 2 msec. Default is 50 (=100ms).
nnn
OOSC
Out-of-Service Counter.
Range for nnn of 0-255 with a default of 5.
LD 73 - Changing trunk pad category values
Prompt
REQ
Response
CHG
Description
Change data.
2.0 Mb PRI.
TYPE
FEAT
PDCA
PRI2
PADS
#
PAD table-0 is default and is hard coded.
The following prompts define the pad levels.
The receiving pad code is r and the transmission pad code is t. These entries have the range 0-15.
The pad values (in decibels) relating to these codes are shown after this table.
r t
r t
ONP
On-premises extension.
DSET
Meridian Digital set.
Prompted only if the 2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped.
r t
r t
r t
r t
r t
r t
r t
r t
r t
r t
r t
r t
r t
r t
OPX
DTT
Off-premises extension.
Digital TIE trunks.
SDTT
NTC
TRC
DCO
VNL
Digital Satellite TIE trunks.
Nontransmission compensated.
Transmission compensated.
Digital COT, FEX, WAT, and DID trunks.
Via Net Loss.
DTO
ACO
AFX
2.0 Mb PRI2 digital TOLL office trunks.
Analog CO or WATS trunks.
Analog FEX trunks.
ADD
SATT
ATO
PRI2
Analog DID trunks.
Analog satellite TIE trunks.
Analog TOLL office trunks.
2.0 Mb PRI trunk.
Prompted only if the 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped
and TYPE=2.0 Mb PRI.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRI software implementation 281
Prompt
Response
Description
r t
XUT
Analog CO trunk.
Prompted only if the 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped
and TYPE=PRI2.
r t
XEM
Analog TIE trunk.
Prompted only if the 1.5/2.0 Mb Gateway feature is equipped
and TYPE=PRI2.
Positive dB represents loss and negative dB represents gain.
Table 103
Pad values
5
7
code
0
1
2
3
4
6
value
(dB)
0.0
+1.0
+2.0
+3.0
+4.0
+5.0
+6.0
+7.0
code
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
-1
value
(dB)
+8.0
+9.0
+10.0
+11.0
+12.0
+13.0
+14.0
code
16
-2
17
-3
18
-4
19
-5
20
-6
21
-7
22
-8
23
-9
value
(dB)
24
25
26
code
value
(dB)
-10
idle
+0.6
Configure DPNSS1 with IP expansion cabinets/Media Gateway systems
For Small Systems, when configuring a PRI2 card slot number for DPNSS1,
the response to the DDCS prompt in LD 17 is: 1-9 (Option 11C Cabinet),
11-19 (IP expansion cabinet 1), 21-29 (IP expansion cabinet 2), 31-39 (IP
expansion cabinet 3), 41-49 (IP expansion cabinet 4).
Configure ISDN BRI trunking with IP expansion cabinets/Media Gateway
systems
For Small Systems, when configuring the MISP card slot number for ISDN
BRI trunking in LD 27, the response to the LOOP prompt is: 1-9 (Option
11C Cabinet), 11-19 (IP expansion cabinet 1), 21-29 (IP expansion cabinet
2), 31-39 (IP expansion cabinet 3), 41-49 (IP expansion cabinet 4).
For Small Systems, when configuring the DSL for ISDN BRI trunking in
LD 27, the response to the MISP prompt is: 1-9 (Option 11C Cabinet),
11-19 (IP expansion cabinet 1), 21-29 (IP expansion cabinet 2), 31-39 (IP
expansion cabinet 3), 41-49 (IP expansion cabinet 4).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282 2.0 Mb PRI implementation
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
283
2.0 Mb ISL implementation
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:
Overview
This chapter provides the information required to implement ISL on the
system including:
•
•
hardware and software installation
implementation of components needed to provide basic call service
ISDN features are treated separately in the chapter devoted to ISDN feature
implementation.
This chapter assumes that ESN implementation is already in place. It also
assumes that the reader has a basic understanding of NARS and CDP.
Two modes of ISL are available: shared and dedicated. This chapter covers
ISL installation in dedicated mode using dedicated and leased lines. Shared
mode installations are done according to the instructions supplied for PRI,
with the noted exceptions.
ISL hardware requirements
ISL, regardless of the operation mode, uses analog or digital TIE lines as
B-channels.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284 2.0 Mb ISL implementation
ISL in shared mode
In shared mode, PRI hardware is required in addition to the existing TIE
lines interface cards.
•
•
NT8D15 Analog trunk card(s)
NTAK02 SDI/DCH, NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI, NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI, or
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card(s)
Figure 88
ISL in shared mode
ISL in dedicated mode using leased line
The following hardware is required:
•
•
NTAK02 SDI/DCH D-channel handler interface
A modem capable of the following: (such as Ventel 2400-33 or 2400
Plus II)
— minimum of 2400 baud
— synchronous operation
— must support leased line (also known as private line or point-to-point)
operation
•
NTAK19BA 4-Port SDI Cable
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISL hardware requirements 285
Figure 89
ISL in dedicated mode using leased line
ISL in dedicated mode using dialup modem
The requirements are as follows:
•
•
NTAK02 SDI/DCH D-channel handler interface.
Modems such as the Ventel 2400, Hayes 2400 (the Hayes Smartmodem
2400 cannot be used on leased lines) or Gandalf 2400 that can support
2 or 4-wire leased line operation. 4-wire operation must be specified
when ordering. Otherwise, modems are factory shipped for 2-wire
operation. Modems capable of the following:
— autodial capability
— minimum of 2400 baud
— synchronous operation
— programmable so that one modem originates the call while the other
auto-answers
•
•
NTAK19BA 4-port SDI cable.
NT8D09 500 set line card.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286 2.0 Mb ISL implementation
Figure 90
ISL in dedicated mode using dialup modem
ISL hardware installation
Shared mode
The hardware installation is identical to the PRI installation, with the addition
of analogue or digital TIE trunks (or both).
Dedicated mode
The NTAK02 connects to the modem through the NTAK19BA 4-port cable.
Only ports 1 and 3 are available for use as DCHIs.
Procedure 42
Installing the NTAK02
Step Action
1
jumper settings" (page 287), for mode of operation that is, RS232 or
RS422 and DTE or DCE.
2
3
Install the NTAK02 in any spare slot 1-9 of the Main Cabinet or slots
11-14 of the Media Gateway.
Install the NTAK19BA four port cable on the 50-pin Amphenol
connector associated with the slot holding the NTAK02.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISL hardware installation 287
Table 104
NTAK02 switch settings
Port 0
SDI
SDI
—
Port 1
DCH
SW1-1
OFF
OFF
ON
SW1-2
OFF
ON
DPNSS1
ESDI
ON
Port 2
SDI
SDI
—
Port 3
DCH
SW1-3
OFF
OFF
ON
SW1-4
OFF
ON
DPNSS1
ESDI
ON
Table 105
NTAK02 jumper settings
Jumper
Strap for
Strap for
Jumper
Unit
location
DTE
DCE
location
RS422
RS232
Unit 0
Unit 1
J10
C - B
B - A
J7
J6
C - B
C - B
B - A
B - A
J9
J8
C - B
C - B
B - A
B - A
Unit 2
Unit 3
J5
C - B
B - A
J4
J3
C - B
C - B
B - A
B - A
J2
J1
C - B
C - B
B - A
B - A
—End—
Procedure 43
Setting up the D-channel
Step Action
1
If this is a dedicated mode installation using leased line modems,
the D-channel connects the DCHI with the far-end modem over a
dedicated leased line. Synchronous modems with a minimum 2400
baud data rate must be configured. Modems must support leased
line capability and synchronous mode. The Hayes Smartmodem
2400 cannot be used on leased lines.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288 2.0 Mb ISL implementation
If this a dedicated mode using dialup modems, modems such as
Hayes 2400, Ventel 2400 or Gandalf 2400 can be used. In this
configuration, the DCHI connects to a modem which is connected
to a 500 set line card. The call connects to the far-end through the
500 set-to-TIE trunk path.
Program the modem at one end in the autodial mode, so it
automatically initiates a call to the other end at power up. The
autodial number must be coordinated with the far-end switch. The
originating modem has this autodial number stored internally as part
of the modem configuration routine.
The far-end modem need only be setup for auto-answer.
—End—
ISL software implementation
There are two modes of ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) operation, shared mode
and dedicated mode.
Shared mode
The NTAK79 onboard DCHI supports ISDN PRI signaling and ISL trunks.
The configuration is basically the same as the PRI D-channel, with the
D-channel also supporting ISL trunks.
The DTI/PRI software implementation sequence can be used (refer to the
appropriate chapters for more information) with the following exceptions.
LD 17 - Shared mode
Prompt
USR
Response
SHA
Description
D-channel for ISL in "shared" mode, used for both ISDN PRI and ISL.
1-240
ISLM
Number of ISL B-channel (trunks) controlled by the D-channel (no
default value).
LD 16 - Interface type
Prompt
IFC
Response
Description
SL1
Interface type must be SL1 (this is the only type supported for ISL).
TIE route used for ISL members.
MODE
ISLD
LD 14 - Channel identifier
Prompt
Response
Description
1-240
CHID
Channel identifier for ISL channels. Must be coordinated with the
far-end.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISL software implementation 289
Dedicated mode
The DCHI uses the NTAK02 circuit card and does not support ISDN PRI
signaling. The DCHI is reserved for ISL use only. The D-channel can
communicate with the far-end by means of a dedicated leased line modem
or dialup modem.
Note that the following implementation relates to analogue TIE trunks being
used as B-channels. In the case where DTI/PRI trunks are also used, then
LD 17 digital loop (2.0 Mb PRI) and LD73 (2.0 Mb PRI/SYTI) must also be
configured with the appropriate clocking and threshold settings.
For ISL dedicated mode using a dialup modem, a 500 set, TIE trunk
"Configuring basic ISL capability" (page 289) summarizes the required
steps.
Table 106
Configuring basic ISL capability
Step
LD
17
15
16
Action
1
2
3
Configure the D-channel for ISL use.
Enable ISDN option.
Enable the ISL option on a per route basis, assign a D-channel
for each route.
4
14
Assign a channel identification to each trunk with the ISL
option.
LD 17 - Configure the D-channel for ISL
Prompt
REQ
Response
CHG
Description
Change existing data
Configuration data block.
Add primary D-channel.
D-channel card type.
TYPE
ADAN
CTYP
CDNO
CFN
NEW DCH 0-79
DCHI
0-15
Serial Data Interface (SDI) Card number.
Number the SDI cards logically with the
system.
1-9 11-19 21-29,
31-39 41-49
MSDL application small system Card
number
1-50
1
DCHI small system Card number
Must be set to 1.
PORT
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290 2.0 Mb ISL implementation
Prompt
USR
Response
PRI
Description
D-channel for ISDN PRI only.
Interface type.
IFC
SL1
1-9
DCHL
PRI2 card number. (Must match entry for
CDNO).
SIDE
RLS
NET (USR)
XX
Net: network, the controlling switch.
User: slave to controller.
Software release of far-end. This is the
current software release of the far-end. If
the far-end has an incompatible release
of software, it prevents the sending of
application messages. For example, for
Network Ring Again.
CLOK
D-channel clock type for signaling.
EXT
Source of D-channel clock is external to
DCHI card (in this case the DTI/PRI circuit
card). Normally, EXT is used for PRI/ISL.
Note 1: Do not confuse this clock with
the E1 span Clock Controller found on the
NTAK10/79. This clock is in reference to the
DCHI synchronous mode of operation.
Note 2: If directly connecting two DCHI ports
with out the use of modems, set "CLOK" to
"EXT" on one side and "INT" on the other.
LAPD
T23
YES,(NO)
1-(20)-31
Change LAPD parameters. Simply carriage
return if timers are to be left at default value.
The following timers are prompted only if
LAPD is set to YES. The following can all be
left at default during initial setup.
Interface guard timer checks how long the
interface takes to respond. In units of 0.5
seconds (default 20 = 10 seconds).
T200
N200
2-(3)-40
1-(3)-8
Retransmission timer in units of 0.5 seconds
(default 3 = 1.5 seconds).
Maximum number of retransmissions.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISL software implementation 291
Prompt
Response
Description
N201
4(260)
Maximum number of octets in information
field.
K
1-(7)-32
Maximum number of outstanding
unacknowledged frames (NAKS).
LD 15 - Enable the ISDN option
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ:
NEW
CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE:
CUST
NET
0-99
Networking data.
Customer number
Range for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and Media
Gateway
1000E
0-31
Range for Small System, Media Gateway 1000B,
Customer is equipped with ISDN.
ISDN
PNI
YES
1-32700
Customer private network identifier. MUST be unique to
this customer in the private network. Used as part of the
setup message for feature operation such as Network Ring
Again and Network ACD.
HNPA
HNXX
NPA
NXX
Telephone area code for this system. Sent as part of setup
message as CLID.
Telephone local exchange code for this system. Sent as
part of setup message for calling line identification.
HLOC
LSC
XXX
Home location code (NARS).
1-9999
One to four digit Local Steering Code established in the
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP). The LSC prompt is
required for Calling Line ID and Network ACD.
AC2
Access Code 2. Enter call types (type of number) that use
access code 2. Multiple responses are permitted. This
prompt only appears on NARS equipped systems. If a call
type is not entered here, it is automatically defaulted to
access code 1.
NPA
NXX
INTL
SPN
LOC
E.164 National.
E.164 Subscriber.
International.
Special Number.
Location Code.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292 2.0 Mb ISL implementation
LD 16 - Enable the ISL option
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ
NEW CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE
CUST
ROUT
RDB
xx
Route data block.
Customer number, as defined in LD 15
Route number
0-511
0-127
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway
1000B.
TKTP
DTRK
TIE
TIE trunk route.
YES
NO
Enter YES if this is a Digital Trunk Interface (DTI or PRI).
ISDN
MODE
DCHI
YES
ISLD
XX
ISDN option.
Route for ISL application.
DCHI port number in CFN to carry the D-channel for this
TIE trunk route.
1-32700
PNI
IFC
Customer private network identifier. Must be the same as
the CDB PNI at the fa- end.
Interface type.
SLl
System to system.
aaa
<CR>
CTYP
INAC
Call Type. Enter the call type to be associated with the
outgoing route for direct dialing using the trunk access
code (instead of NARS access code).
YES
Insert Access Code. Permits the NARS AC1 or AC2
access code to be reinserted automatically on an incoming
ESN call.
LD 14 - Assign a channel identifier
Prompt
Response
Description
REQ
NEW
CHG
Add new data.
Change existing data.
TYPE
TN
TIE
TIE trunk type.
Terminal Number
l s c u
c u
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.
Format for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway 1000B
where c = card and u = unit.
RTMB
Route number and Member number
0-511 1-4000
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISL software implementation 293
Prompt
Response
0-127 1-4000
1-240
Description
Range for Meridian 1 Small System, Media Gateway 1000B.
CHID
Channel identifier for ISL channels (remove with Xnn). Must be
coordinated with far-end (no default value).
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294 2.0 Mb ISL implementation
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
295
Nonstandard cables
Contents
The section contains information on the following topics:
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296 Nonstandard cables
Introduction
This section provides information required to build systems cables of
nonstandard lengths for ISDN PRI applications.
NT5K40AA, NT5K41AA, NT5K86AA
These cables are used to transport the 2Mb digital signal from the faceplate
connector on the PRI card to the Line Terminating Equipment interface.
•
Standard lengths:
— NT5K40AA - 4 m (13 ft.)
— NT5K41AA - 8 m (26 ft.)
— NT5K86AA - 12m (39 ft.)
•
Construction - 75 ohm dual co-axial type with solid inner conductor and
braided shield.
•
•
•
J1 Connector - 15-pin, male, subminiature D with jackscrews
J2 Connector - 75 ohm BNC crimp plug
J3 Connector - 75 ohm BNC crimp plug
Table 107
NT5K40AA, NT5K41AA, NT5K86AA wire list
From
To
(pack end)
(I/O end)
Signal
J1-1
J1-9
J1-3
J1-11
J1-9
J2 Inner Conductor
J2 Shield
XTIP (transmit)
XRING (transmit)
RTIP (receive)
RRING (receive)
FRAME GROUND
J3 Inner Conductor
J3 Shield
J3 Shield
NT8D7206, NT8D7207
This cable is used to transport the 2Mb/s digital signal from the PRI pack to
the I/O assembly located at the cabinet bulkhead.
•
Standard length -
3.05 m (10 ft.) for Half Group systems and Single group systems
•
•
Construction - 24 AWG, stranded foil-shielded twisted pairs
P1 Connector (Pack end) - 9-pin, male, subminiature D, with jackscrews
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
QCAD128 297
•
P2 Connector (I/O Panel end) - 9-pin, male, subminiature D, with
jackscrews
Table 108
NT8D7206, NT8D7207 wire list
From
To
Color
(pack end)
P1-1
P1-9
nc
(I/O end)
Signal
White
P2-6
XTIP (transmit)
XRING (transmit)
GROUND
Black
P2-7
Green Shield
Red
P2-CASE P2-9
P2-2
P1-3
P1-11
nc
RTIP (receive)
RRING (receive)
GROUND
Black
P2-3
Red Shield
P2-CASE P2-5
QCAD128
This cable transports the T1 signal from the PRI pack to the I/O panel.
•
•
•
•
Standard length - 10 ft. (3.05 m)
Construction - 15-conductor ribbon, 28 AWG (0.321 mm), stranded
P1 Connector - 15-pin, male, subminiature D, with jackscrews
P2 Connector - 15-pin, male, subminiature D, with jackscrews
Table 109
QCAD128 wire list
From
P1-1
P1-2
P1-3
To
Signal
P2-1
P2-2
P2-3
XTIP (transmit tip) to telephone company
GND (ground)
RTIP (receive tip) from telephone
company
P1-4
P1-5
P1-6
P1-7
P1-8
P1-9
P2-4
P2-5
P2-6
P2-7
P2-8
P2-9
GND (ground)
XRING (transmit ring) to telephone
company
P1-10
P2-10
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298 Nonstandard cables
From
To
Signal
P1-11
P2-11
RRING (receive ring) from telephone
company
P1-12
P1-13
P1-14
P1-15
P2-12
P2-13
P2-14
P2-15
QCAD129
This cable is used to connect the RS-232-C interface between an echo
canceller and the PRI pack.
•
•
•
•
Standard length - 2.1 m (7 ft.)
Construction - 22 AWG (0.644 mm), stranded
P1 Connector - 15-pin, male, subminiature D, with jackscrews
P2 connector - 25-pin, male, subminiature D, with jackscrews
Table 110
QCAD129 wire list
Echo
Canceller
Signal
PRI Signal
DCD
From
P1-1
To
P2-20
P2-2
P2-8
P2-3
P2-7
P2-4
P2-5
nc
DTR
TXD
DCD
RXD
GND
RXD
P1-2
DTR
P1-4
TXD
P1-5
GND
RTS
P1-10
P1-12
P1-9
CTS
TPENB
P1-15
(Test Port
Enable Bar)
QCAD133
For cabinets with an I/O filter assembly, this cable transports the T1 signal
from the I/O filter to the Network Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT8D7205 299
For cabinets without an I/O filter assembly, this cable transports the
T1 signal from the QPC720 PRI pack to the NCTE telephone company
interface.
•
•
Standard length - 50 ft (15.3 m)
Construction - Individually foil-shielded, twisted pairs, 24 AWG (0.511
mm), stranded
•
•
P1 Connector - 15-pin, female, subminiature D with jackscrews
P2 Connector - 15-pin, male, subminiature D, with slide-latch (optional
spring-latch loose-packed with cable assembly)
Table 111
QCAD133 wire list
Color
From
To
PRI signal
WHITE
P1-1
P2-1
XTIP (transmit tip) to
telephone company
BLACK
P1-9
P2-9
XRING (transmit ring) to
telephone company
nc
GRN SHLD
RED
P1-2
P1-3
GND (ground)
P2-3
RTIP (receive tip) from
telephone company
BLACK
P1-11
P1-4
P2-11
nc
RRING (receive ring) from
telephone company
RED SHLD
GND (ground)
NT8D7205
This cable is used to transport the 2Mb digital signal from the I/O panel
at the cabinet bulkhead to the Network Channel Terminating Equipment
(NCTE) telephone company interface.
•
•
Standard length - 15.3 m (50 ft.)
Construction - Individually foil-shielded, twisted pairs, 24 AWG (0.511
mm), stranded
•
•
P1 Connector - 9-pin, female, subminiature D with jackscrews
P2 Connector - 9-pin, male, subminiature D, with jack screws
Table 112
NT8D7205 wire list
From
To
Color
(pack end)
(I/O end)
Signal
White
P1-6
P2-6
XTIP (transmit)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300 Nonstandard cables
From
To
Color
(pack end)
(I/O end)
Signal
Black
P1-7
P1-9
P1-2
P1-3
P1-5
P2-7
nc
XRING (transmit)
GROUND
Green Shield
Red
P2-2
P2-3
nc
RTIP (receive)
RRING (receive)
GROUND
Black
Red Shield
QCAD328
This cable is used to connect the PRI pack to the D-channel interface card,
either the QPC757 or NT6D11AB DCHI. There are two types of QCAD328
cables: QCAD328A and QCAD328B.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
QCAD328A - 1.8 m (6 ft)
QCAD328B - 5.5 m (18 ft)
QCAD328C - 10.67 m (35 ft)
QCAD328D - 15.24 m (50 ft)
Construction - 24 AWG (0.511 mm), stranded
P1 Connector - 25-pin male, subminiature D
P2 Connector - 15-pin male, subminiature D
Table 113
QCAD328 wire list
From
P1-2
To
Signal
SDA+
SDB-
TR
P2-2
P2-10
P2-15
P2-9
P2-11
P2-4
P2-12
P2-5
P2-13
P2-8
P1-8
P1-1
P2-1
P1-13
P1-20
P1-15
P1-14
P1-3
STA+
STB-
RDA+
RDB-
RTA+
RTB-
RR
P1-16
P1-17
P1-12
P1-8
P1-5
CS
P1-7
SG
P1-1
GND
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NT8D83 PRI/DTI to I/O cable 301
NT8D74 Clock Controller to InterGroup cable
This cable connects the QPC471 Clock Controller card to the NT8D36
InterGroup Module.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
•
•
•
•
•
NT8D74AC
1.2 m (4 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
2.4 m (8 ft)
3 m (10 ft)
4.8 m (16 ft)
NT8D74AD
NT8D74AE
NT8D74AF (QCAD110B)
NT8D74AJ
NT8D75 Clock Controller to Clock Controller cable
This cable interconnects QPC471 Clock Controller cards.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
•
•
•
NT8D75AC
NT8D75AD
QCAD125
1.2 m (4 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
3 m (10 ft)
NT8D79 PRI/DTI to Clock Controller cable
This cable connects the PRI/DTI card to the QPC471 Clock Controller card.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
•
•
•
•
•
NT8D79AB
NT8D79AC
NT8D79AD
NT8D79AE
0.6 m (2 ft)
1.2 m (4 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
2.4 m (8 ft)
3 m (10 ft)
NT8D79AF
(QCAD130)
NT8D83 PRI/DTI to I/O cable
This cable connects the PRI/DTI card (T1 port) to the I/O connector panel.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
•
•
NT8D83AC
NT8D83AD
1.2 m (4 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
302 Nonstandard cables
NT8D85 Network to IPE cable
This cable connects the following:
•
•
•
QPC581 CMA card to QPC581 CMA card in dual CPU configuration
QPC414 Network card to PRI/DTI card
QPC414 Network card to QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card
(for internal cabling only)
•
QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card to QPC659 Dual Loop
Peripheral Buffer card when connecting two NT8D13 IPE Modules
together
This cable is available in the following lengths:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NT8D85AB
NT8D85AC
NT8D85AZ
NT8D85AD
NT8D85AE
NT8D85AF
NT8D85AJ
NT8D85AL
NT8D85AP
NT8D85AV
0.6 m (2 ft)
1.2 m (4 ft)
1.5 m (5 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
2.4 m (8 ft)
3 m (10 ft)
4.8 m (16 ft)
6 m (20 ft)
7.6 m (25 ft)
13.7 m (45 ft)
NT8D86 Network to I/O cable
This cable connects the following to the I/O connector panel:
QPC414 Network card
PRI/DTI card
•
•
•
•
QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card
NT8D47 RPE
This cable is available in the following lengths:
•
•
NT8D86AC
NT8D86AD
1.5 m (5 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
NT8D97AX PRI/DTI I/O to MDF cable
This cable connects the PRI/DTI card to the MDF through the I/O connector
panel. It is 15.2 m (50 ft) long.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NTND98 PRI to I/O panel cables 303
NT9J93AD PRI/DTI Echo Canceller to I/O cable
This cable connects the PRI/DTI Echo Canceller port to the I/O connector
panel. It is 1.8 m (6 ft) long.
NTND26 PRI to MSDL cables
These cables connect the MSDL card to the PRI cards.
•
•
•
•
NTND26AA 6 feet
NTND26AB 18 feet
NTND26AC 35 feet
NTND26AD 50 feet
NTND27 MSDL to I/O panel cables
These cables connect the MSDL card to the I/O panel.
•
NTND27
6 ft
NTND98 PRI to I/O panel cables
These cables connect the PRI card to the I/O panel.
•
NTND98
6 ft
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304 Nonstandard cables
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
NN43001-301 02.03 Standard
Release 5.5 7 December 2007
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nortel Communication Server 1000
ISDN Primary Rate Interface Installation and Commissioning
Copyright © 2003-2007, Nortel Networks
All Rights Reserved.
Publication: NN43001-301
Document status: Standard
Document version: 02.03
Document date: 7 December 2007
To provide feedback or to report a problem with this document, go to www.nortel.com/documentfeedback.
Sourced in Canada
LEGAL NOTICE
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing
NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice.
Nortel, the Nortel Logo, the Globemark, SL-1, Meridian1, and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|